03 Mech Ug Full 7copies

ALAGAPPA CHETTIAR GOVERNEMNT COLLEGE OF
ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY

KARAIKUDI –630 003
An Autonomous Institution, Aﬃliated to Anna University, Chennai
B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
(FULL TIME) & PART TIME

REGULATIONS – 2019, CURRICULUM & SYLLABUS
Applicable to the students admitted from the

academic year 2019—2020 onwards.
CONTENT
1. College Vision and Mission 1
2. Department Vision and Mission 2
3. Programed Educational Objective (PEO) 3
4. Programed Outcomes (PO) 4
5. Programed Speciﬁc Outcomes (PSO) 6
6. Regulation 2019 UG (Full time) 7
7. Regulation 2019 UG (Part time) 25
8. I Year (Full Time) Curriculum and Syllabus 37
9. III Sem - VIII Sem (Full Time & Part Time) Curriculum and Syllabus 65
1
Alagappa Chettiar Government College

of Engineering and Technology
Karaikudi – 630 003.
Sivagangai District, Tamilnadu
(An Autonomous Institution, Permanently affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
(Accredited with B++ Grade by NAAC)
COLLEGE VISION AND MISSION
Vision
Our commitment as a Centre of Engineering Education is to impart technical knowledge par excellence,
motivate the learners in research, evolve result-oriented, innovative techniques in Engineering, provide
necessary career guidance, and train our students in leadership qualities so as to achieve better
productivity and prosperity for our country.
Mission
Constantly updating the departmental resources, facility and other infrastructure by acquiring state of
art equipment. Imparting constant in–service training to the faculty and supporting staff. Providing state
of art education and training to the students. Motivating the students to excel and augmenting their
knowledge through continuing education programs. Providing soft skill development learning to
students.
Approved by 10th Academic Council Meeting held on 12.04.2019 and 11th Academic Council meeting held on 02.12.2020
2
DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

VISION AND MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT
Vision of the Department:
To become a center of excellence and to produce high quality, self-motivated,
creative and ethical engineers and technologists, contributing effectively to
universal science and contemporary developments for the benefit of the society.
Mission of the Department:
M1: To impart high quality Engineering education and to inculcate ethics to the
Students.
M2: To adopt the best pedagogical methods in order to maximize knowledge
transfer.
M3: To have adequate mechanisms to enhance understanding of implementation
of theoretical concepts in practical scenarios and make the students readily
employable in industries.
M4: To carry out high quality research leadings to the creation and
commercialization of intellectual property.
M5: To provide the best facilities, infrastructure, and environment to the
students, researchers and faculty members, creating an ambience
conductive for excellence in technical education.
3
PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES
PEO1 To provide a strong foundation in Mathematics, Basic Sciences and
Engineering fundamentals required to excel in Mechanical Engineering.
PEO2 To prepare students with good scientific, analytical and applied skills to
design and analyze engineering products.
PEO3 To motivate the students for lifelong learning, entrepreneurship abilities
with ethical values.
PEO4 To train the students to have effective communication, team building,
leadership and decision making so as to be a successful professional
engineer fulfilling societal needs.
4
PROGRAM OUTCOMES
Engineering Graduates will be able to:
1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science,

engineering fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of
complex engineering problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze

complex engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first
principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering

problems and design system components or processes that meet the specified
needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the
cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based

knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and
interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid
conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques,

resources, and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and
modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the
limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual

knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the
consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
5
7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional

engineering Solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate
the knowledge of, and need or sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and

responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a

member or leader In diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering

activities with the Engineering community and with society at large, such as,
being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and

understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply these to
one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in
multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and
ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of
technological change.
6
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES
1. Be able to provide cost effective and viable solution to the issues in the
domain of Manufacturing and Energy System.
2. Have the knowledge in the area of Contemporary Design
3. Be capable to respond to Environmental and Societal needs.
7
ALAGAPPA CHETTIAR GOVERNMENT COLLEGE OF

KARAIKUDI – 630 003
(An Autonomous Institution, Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
Regulations – 2019
(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)
Degree of Bachelor of Engineering

(B.E.)
(Applicable to the students who are admitted

from the academic year 2019-2020 onwards)
8

KARAIKUDI – 630 003
(An Autonomous Institution, Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
Regulations – 2019
(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)
FOR
Degree of Bachelor of Engineering (B.E)
(Applicable to the students admitted from the academic year 2019-2020 onwards)
1. Preliminary definitions and nomenclature
In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires:
(i) “Programme” means Degree Programme, that is B.E. Degree Programme.
(ii) “Discipline” means specialization or branch of B.E. Degree Programme, like Civil
Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, etc.
(iii) “Course” means a theory or practical subject that is normally studied in a
semester, like Mathematics, Physics, etc.
(iv) “Head of the Institution” means the Principal of the Institution.
(v) “Controller of Examinations” means the authority of the Institution who is
responsible for all Examinations related activities of the Institution.
(vi) “University” means ANNA UNIVERSITY
2. Admission
2.1 Regular Admission
Candidates seeking admission to the First semester B.E degree Programme should
have passed the Higher secondary examination of (10+2) curriculum (Academic
stream) prescribed by the Government of Tamilnadu with Mathematics, Physics
and Chemistry as three of the four subjects of study under Part III or any
examination of any other University or authority accepted by the syndicate of Anna
University, Chennai as equivalent thereto or should have passed the Higher
secondary examinations of vocational stream (Vocational groups in Engg. / Tech.)
as prescribed by the Government of Tamilnadu.
2.2 Lateral Entry Admission
2.2.1 The candidates who possess the Diploma in Engg. / Technology awarded by
the State Board of Technical Education, Tamilnadu or its equivalent are
9
eligible to apply for direct admission to the third semester of B.E degree
Programme under Lateral Entry Scheme in the branch corresponding to the
branch of study.
or
2.2.3 The candidates who possess the Degree of science (B.Sc) (10+2+3 stream)
with mathematics as a subject at the +2 level are eligible to apply for
admission to the third semester of B.E Degree Programme. Such candidate
shall undergo two additional engineering subjects in the third and fifth
semester or fourth and six semesters respectively as prescribed by the
respective discipline. (Annexure – I).
3. Programmes Offered
A candidate may be offered admission to any one of the disciplines approved by AICTE
and it is offered by this Institution. The Programme offered by the institution is given in
Annexure II.
4. Structure of the Programme
The duration of UG Degree Programme is to be normally of 4 academic years (=8
Semesters), with the year being divided into two Semesters of 20 weeks (>=90 working
days) consisting of Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) in the Semester & Semester
End Examination (SEE) in every semester.
4.1 Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)
The CBCS provides choice to the students to select a number of courses from the
prescribed courses (core, elective or minor or soft skill courses, etc.) in order to earn
required credit for the award of degree.
4.2 Course
Usually referred to, as ‘papers’ is a component of a Programme. All courses need
not carry the same weight. The courses should define learning objectives and
learning outcomes. A course may be designed to comprise lectures/
tutorials/laboratory work / field work / outreach activities/ project work / vocational
training /viva / seminars / term papers / assignments / presentations / self-study etc.
or a combination of some of these. The typical course structure suggested by AICTE
is shown in Annexure – III. The courses of a Programme are categorized as follows:
(i) Humanities and Social Sciences (HS) courses, Engineering Ethics and
Human Values, Communication skills, Environmental Science and
10
Engineering.
(ii) Basic Sciences (BS) courses include Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry,
Biology, etc.
(iii) Engineering Sciences (ES) courses include Engineering practices,
Engineering Graphics, Basics of Electrical / Electronics / Mechanical /
Computer Engineering, Instrumentation etc.
(iv) Professional Core Courses (PC): A course which is compulsorily studied
by a student for the requirement of a programme in his / her discipline of
study.
(v) Professional Elective Courses (PE): Generally, a course which can be
chosen from a pool of courses and which may be very specific or
specialized or advanced or supportive to the discipline /domain or nurtures
the candidate’s proficiency/ skill is called Professional Elective Course.
(vi) Open Elective Courses (OE): An elective course chosen generally from
other discipline / subject, with an intention to seek interdisciplinary
exposure is called an open elective. Every student shall earn 9 credits by
choosing three of the open elective courses from the open elective list
offered by different departments. While choosing the electives, students
shall ensure that they do not opt for the courses with syllabus contents of
which are similar to that of their departmental core/elective courses.
(vii) Employability Enhancement Courses (EEC) include Project Work and/or
Internship, Seminar, Professional Practices, Case Study and
Industrial/Practical Training.
(viii) Mandatory Courses prescribed by AICTE/UGC (not for credit calculation)
(ix) Self Study Courses: An elective course designed to acquire a
special/advanced knowledge, such as supplement study/support study to a
project work, and a candidate studies such a course on his own with an
advisory support by a teacher is called a Self Study. A student shall
undergo two self- study courses for the entire duration of study.
(x) One Credit Courses: One credit course shall be offered by the Department
with the prior approval from the BOS and Academic Council. Normally
one credit courses to be designed by Industrial / Academic expert for 15
contact hours. The credits earned through the one credit courses shall be
11
over and above the minimum credit requirement prescribed in the

curriculum. The students shall undergo one credit courses offered in other
Departments with the permission of Head of Department.
(xi) Online Courses: Students shall earn credit through online courses offered
by international / National recognized Institutions with prior permission
from the respective Head of the Department.
(xii) Audit Courses: Students shall be able to register for Courses outside the
prescribed range of Credits for audit only, when interested to supplement
their knowledge/skills; Optional for students to register these course and/or
seek their inclusion in the Grade cards or Transcripts issued (but, not for
earning Credit).
4.3 Credit Representation
Credit values assigned for different academic activities are shown in the following
table
1 Hr. Lecture (L) per week 1 credit
1 Hr. Tutorial (T) per week 1 credit
1 Hr. Practical (P) per week 0.5 credit
4.4 Course Load

Every student should register for a set of Courses in each Semester, with the total
number of their Credits being limited by considering the permissible weekly Contact
Hours.
4.5 Course Registration
Every student should formally register for Courses (Credits) as advice per the
guidance of the faculty adviser in each Semester. It is helpful for monitoring the
CIE, SEE performance in each case and to assist the students in self-paced learning
by dropping/withdrawing from Course(s), and to avail of Course Flexibility;
4.6 Course Evaluation
CIE and SEE to constitute the major evaluations prescribed for each Course. Each
Course has to be evaluated for 100 marks, irrespective of its Credits.
4.7 Credits Required for Degree Award
It is suggested that the minimum number of Credits to be earned by a student for the
award of Degree should be between 160 and 165 specified in the curriculum of the
12
relevant branch.
4.8 Grade Point Average (GPA)
It is a measure of performance of work done in a semester. It is ratio of total credit
points secured by a student in various courses registered in a semester and the total
course credits taken during that semester.
4.9 Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA)
It is a measure of overall cumulative performance of a student over all semesters.
The CGPA is the ratio of total credit points secured by a student in various courses
in all semesters and the sum of the total credits of all courses in all the semesters.
4.10 Medium of Instruction
The medium of instruction is English for all courses, examinations, seminar
presentations and project / thesis / dissertation reports.
5. Duration of the Programme
5.1 A student is normally expected to complete the B.E. Programme in minimum
period of four academic years but in any case, not more than 14 Semesters for
HSC candidates and not more than 12 semesters for Lateral entry students.
5.2 Each semester shall normally consist of roughly 90 working days. The Principal
shall ensure that every teacher imparts instruction as per the number of periods/
weeks specified in the syllabus and that the teacher teaches the full content of the
specified syllabus for the course being taught.
5.3 The Principal may permit to conduct additional classes for improvement, special
coaching, conduct of model test etc., over and above the specified periods. The end
semester examination will follow immediately after the last working day of every
semester as prescribed in the academic schedule.
5.4 The total period for completion of the Programme reckoned from the
commencement of the first semester to which the candidate was admitted shall not
exceed the maximum period specified in clause (5.1) irrespective of the period of
break of study in order that he / she may be eligible for the award of the degree
(vide clause 13).
6. Faculty Adviser
To help the students in planning their courses of study and for general advice on the
academic Programme, the Head of the Department will attach a certain class of students
to a teacher of the Department who shall function as Faculty Adviser for those
13
students throughout their period of study. Such Faculty Advisers shall advise the students
and monitor the courses undergone by the students, check the attendance and progress of
the students attached to him/her and counsel them periodically. If necessary, the faculty
adviser may also discuss with or inform the parents about the progress of the students.
7. Class committee
7.1 Every class shall have a class committee consisting of teachers handling the class
concerned, student representatives and a chairperson. The objective of the class
committee is to monitor overall the goal of improving the teaching-learning
process. The functions of the class committee include:
• Solving problems experienced by students in the class room and in the
laboratories.
• Clarifying the regulations of the degree Programme and other details relevant
to academic activities. Informing the student representatives on the details of
Regulations regarding weightage used for each course. In the case of
practical courses (laboratory/drawing/project work/Seminar etc.) the breakup
of marks for each experiment / exercise / module of work, should be clearly
discussed in the class committee meeting and informed to the students.
• Analyzing the performance of the students of the class after each series test
and finding the ways and means of solving problems, if any.
• Identifying the weak students, if any, and requesting the teachers concerned
to provide some additional help or guidance or coaching to such weak
students.
• Informing the students about the attendance details of the class at every class
committee meeting and advising the students to attend the classes regularly to
avoid shortage of attendance.
7.2 The class committee for a class under a particular branch is normally constituted by
the Head of the Department. However, if the students of different branches are
mixed in a class (like the first semester which is generally common to all
branches), the class committee is to be constituted by the Principal / Chief faculty
advisor.
7.3 The class committee shall be constituted within the first week of each semester.
7.4 At least 4 student representatives (usually 2 boys and 2 girls) shall be included in the
class committee.
14
7.5 The chairperson of the class committee may invite the Faculty adviser(s) and the
Head of the Department to the meeting of the class committee.
7.6 The Principal may participate in any class committee of the institution.
7.7 The chairperson is required to prepare the minutes of every meeting, submit the
same to Principal within two days of the meeting and arrange to circulate it among
the students and teachers concerned. If there are any recommendations in the
minutes that require necessary action by the Principal, the same shall be brought to
the notice of the Principal.
7.8 The first meeting of the class committee shall be held within one week from
the date of commencement of the semester, in order to inform the students about
the nature and weightage of assessments within the framework of the Regulations.
Two or three subsequent meetings may be held in a semester at suitable intervals.
The Class Committee Chairman shall put on the Notice Board the cumulative
attendance particulars of each student at the end of every such meeting to enable
the students to know their attendance details. During these meetings the student
members representing the entire class, shall meaningfully interact and express the
opinions and suggestions of the other students of the class in order to improve the
effectiveness of the teaching-learning process.
8. Examinations
Performance in each course of study shall be evaluated based on (i) Continuous Internal
Assessment throughout the semester and (ii) End semester examination.
8.1 Each course, both theory and practical (including project work & viva voce
Examinations) shall be evaluated for a maximum of 100 marks.
(a) Theory courses
For all theory courses, the Continuous Internal Assessment will carry 30
marks and the End semester examination will carry 70 marks.
The break-up of marks for continuous internal assessment is as follows:
Average of three assessment test = 20 marks
Average of three Assignment = 10 marks
---------------------------
Total = 30 marks.
---------------------------
15
(b) Practical Courses

Every practical exercise / experiment shall be evaluated based on the
exercise / experiment prescribed as per the syllabi and the records of work
done maintained by the students. The criteria for arriving at the internal
assessment marks (30 marks) shall be decided based on the performance of
the students in all experiments put together and reduced to 20 marks and
one model test will carry 10 marks.
(c) Theory Courses with Laboratory Component
If there is a theory course with Laboratory component, there shall be three
tests: the first two tests (each 100 marks) will be from theory portions and the
third test (maximum mark 100) will be for laboratory component.
8.2 (a) The credits earned through the one credit courses other than curriculum
shall be over and above the minimum credit requirement prescribed in the
curriculum.
The one credit course shall carry 100 marks based on assessments and
Semester End Examination.
(b) The Industrial / Practical Training, Summer Project, Internship shall carry
100 marks and shall be evaluated through internal assessment only. At the
end of Industrial / Practical training / internship / Summer Project, the
candidate shall submit a certificate from the organization where he / she has
undergone training and a brief report. The evaluation will be made based on
this report and a Viva-Voce Examination, conducted internally by a three
member Departmental Committee constituted by the Head of the
Department. The certificates (issued by the organization) submitted by the
students shall be attached to the mark list sent by the Head of the
Department to the Controller of Examinations.
(c) The Seminar shall be evaluated for 30 marks internal and 70 marks external
examinations.
8.3 Project Work
Project work may be allotted to a single student or to a group of students not
exceeding 4 per group. The Head of the department shall constitute a review
committee for project work for each branch of study. There shall be three reviews
during the semester by the review committee. The student shall make presentation
16
on the progress made by him / her before the committee. The total marks obtained
in the three reviews shall be reduced for 30 marks and rounded to the nearest
integer.
8.3.1 The project report shall carry a maximum of 20 marks. The project report
shall be submitted as per the approved guidelines, given by the COE.
Marks shall be awarded to every student within the project group for the
project report. The viva-voce examination shall carry 50 marks. Marks are
awarded to each student of the project group based on the individual
performance in the viva-voce examination.
Review Review Review Guide End Semester Examinations

I II III (report) (Viva-Voce)
Internal External
Examiner Examiner
10 10 10 20 25 25
8.3.2 If a candidate fails to submit the project report on or before the specified
deadline, then the student(s) is not eligible to appear for Project Viva Voce
examination. Further, if a student fails to secure a pass in project work or not
eligible to appear for Viva Voce Examination, the student shall register and
repeat the project work again in the subsequent semesters.
8.4 Internal marks approved by the Head of the Institution shall be displayed by the
respective HODs within 5 days from the last working day.
9. Requirements for appearing End Semester Examinations
A candidate shall normally be permitted to appear for the End Semester Examination of
any course in a particular semester for which he/she has registered the course if he/she
could satisfy 75 % attendance in a course. (For all theory and practical courses except self
study courses).
However, a candidate who secures attendance between 65 % and 75 %, in a
particular semester due to medical reasons (hospitalization / accident / specific illness)
or due to participation in the College / University / State / National / International level
Sports events with prior permission from the Head of the Department concerned shall be
given exemption from the prescribed attendance requirement and he / she shall be
17
permitted to appear all courses registered in that particular semester examinations.

Candidates who secure less than 65 % attendance in a particular course will not
be permitted to write the Semester End Examination. They are required to redo the
particular course.
If a candidate fails to secure at least 65 % attendance in the 50 % of the
registered courses, he/she shall be prevented to write the end semester examinations and
he/she must repeat all the regular courses registered in the next academic year after
getting Re- admission order from the Commissioner of Technical Education.
Registration is mandatory for semester examinations as well as arrears examinations.
A candidate already appeared for a course/ courses in a semester and passed the
examination is not entitled to appear in the same subject or subjects of the semester for
improvement of grades / marks.
10. Passing requirements
10.1 (i)
A candidate who secures not less than 50 % of total marks prescribed for
the courses with minimum of 45 % of the marks prescribed for the End
S emester Examination in both theory and practical courses s h o w n i n
t a b l e (including Project work, except one credit and self study courses),
shall be declared to have passed the examination. The evaluation for the
end semester shall be 100 marks.
(ii) Self study courses have only Semester End Examinations only which
requires 50% of marks to be declared as pass. ( No Internal Assessment).
(iii) One Credit courses shall be assessed with one internal assessment and end
semester examination for 50 marks.
(iv) If anyone fails in an elective course, he may reappear or drop that course
and choose another elective course.
10.2 If a candidate fails to secure a pass in a particular course, it is mandatory that
he/she shall register and reappear for the examination in that course during the
subsequent semester when examination is conducted in that course; he/she should
18
continue to register and reappear for the examinations in the failed courses till he /
she secures a pass.
10.3 The internal assessment marks obtained by the candidate in the first
appearance shall be retained and considered valid for all subsequent examination
till the candidate pass the courses.
11 Award of Letter Grades
All assessments of a course will be done on the basis of absolute marks. However, for
the purpose of reporting the performance of a candidate, letter grades, each carrying
certain number of points, will be awarded as per the range of total marks (out of 100)
obtained by the candidate in each course as detailed below:
Letter Grade Grade Points Marks range
O (Outstanding) 10 91-100
A+(Excellent) 9 81-90
A(Very Good) 8 71-80
B+(Good) 7 61-70
B( Average) 6 50-60
RA 0 Less than 50
AB (Absent) 0
I (Prevented) 0
W( Withdrawal) 0
12 GPA and CGPA Calculation
After results are declared, Grade Sheets will be issued to each student which will
contain the following details:
▪ Name of the Institution
▪ List of courses enrolled during the semester and the grade scored.
▪ Grade Point Average (GPA) for the semester and
▪ Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of all t he courses enrolled from t h e first
semester onwards.
GPA is the ratio of the sum of the products of the number of credits of courses enrolled
and the points corresponding to the grades scored in those courses, taken for all the
courses, to the sum of the credits of all courses registered.
. GPA = Sum of C *GP
Sum of C
“C” - Credits allotted for the subjects.
“GP” – is the grade point corresponding to the letter grade obtained for each course.
19
“CGPA” will be calculated considering all the courses enrolled from first semester.
. “F”, “I” and “W” grades will be excluded for calculating GPA and CGPA.
13. Eligibility for the Award of Degree
A student shall be declared to be eligible for the award of the B.E. Degree provided the
student has
(i) Successfully gained the required number of total credits as specified in the
curriculum corresponding to his / her Programme within the stipulated time.
(ii) Successfully completed any additional courses prescribed by the BOS and
Academic Council whenever, any candidate is readmitted under regulations
other than R-2019 .
(iii) No disciplinary action pending against the student.
(iv) The award of Degree must have been approved by the Syndicate of the
University.
14. Classification of the Degree awarded
14.1 First Class with Distinction
A candidate who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have
passed the examination in First class with Distinction:
• Should have passed the End Semester Examination in all the courses for the
minimum credits prescribed in the curriculum of the respective Programme in
his/her First Appearance within five years (four years for lateral entry students)
including authorized break of study.
• Withdrawal from examination (vide Clause 17) will not be construed as an
appearance.
• Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 8.5
• Should NOT have been prevented from writing end semester examination due to
disciplinary action.
14.2 First Class
A candidate who satisfies the following conditions shall be declared to have
passed the examination in First class:
• Should have passed the End Semester Examination in all the courses registered for
the minimum credits prescribed in the curriculum of the respective Programmes
semesters within five years (Four years for lateral entry students).
• Withdrawal from examination (vide Clause 16) will not be construed as an
20
appearance.
• Should have secured a CGPA of not less than 7.0.
One year authorized break of study (if availed of) is permitted in addition to four
years for award of First class.
14.3 Second Class
All other candidates (not covered in clauses 14.1 and 14.2) who qualify for the
award of the degree shall be declared to have passed the examination in Second
Class.
14.4 A candidate who is absent in semester examination in a course / project work after
having registered for the same shall be considered to have appeared in that
examination for the purpose of classification.
15. Revaluation
15.1 A candidate can apply for revaluation of his/her semester examination answer
paper in a theory course, within 2 weeks from the declaration of results, on
payment of a prescribed fee along with prescribed application to the Controller of
Examinations through the Head of Department. The Controller of Examination
will arrange for the revaluation and the results will be intimated to the candidate
concerned through the Head of the Department. Revaluation is not permitted for
practical courses, seminar and for project work. A candidate can apply for
revaluation of answer scripts for not exceeding 5 subjects at a time.
15.2 If the candidate is not satisfied with the revaluation marks/results, he/she can
challenge, by paying required fee. If there is a change in the result after re-
revaluation, the challenged fee will be refunded to the candidate.
16. Provision for withdrawal from examinations
16.1 A candidate may, for valid reasons, (medically unfit / unexpected family
situations) be granted permission to withdraw from appearing for the examination
in any course or courses in any one of the semester examinations during the entire
duration of the degree Programme. Also, only one application for withdrawal is
permitted for that semester examination in which withdrawal is sought.
16.2 Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to
write the examination (Clause 9) and if it is made within TEN days before the
commencement of the examination in that course or courses and also
recommended by the Head of the Department.
21
16.3 Notwithstanding the requirement of mandatory TEN days notice, applications for
withdrawal for special cases under extraordinary conditions will be considered on
the merit of the case.
16.4 Withdrawal shall not be construed as an appearance for deciding the eligibility of
a candidate for First Class with Distinction and First Class.
16.5 Withdrawal is NOT permitted for arrears examinations of the previous semesters.
17. Authorized Break of study from a Programme
17.1 A candidate is normally not permitted to temporarily break the period of study.
However, if a candidate may avail an authorized break of study for valid reasons
such as accident or hospitalization due to prolonged ill health otherwise for the
purpose of study outside the campus, during the Programme duration. In a
duration of study two semesters break period may be permitted.
17.2 Authorized break of study will be taken into account for classification. (vide
Clause 14.1&14.2).
17.3 The total period for completion of the Programme reckoned from, the
commencement of the first semester to which the candidate was admitted shall not
exceed the maximum period specified in clause 5.1 irrespective of the period of
break of study in order that he / she may be eligible for the award of the degree
(vide clause 13).
17.4 If any student is detained under disciplinary actions, the period spent in that
semester shall not be considered as permitted ‘Break of Study’ and Clause 17.1. is
not applicable for this case.
17.5 If the student does not report back to the department, even after the extended
Break of Study, the name of the candidate shall be deleted permanently from the
college enrollment.
18. Industrial visits / Training
Every student is required to go for at least one Industrial Visit every year starting from the
second year of the Programme. The Heads of Departments shall ensure that necessary
arrangements are made in this regard.
The students may undergo Industrial training for a period as specified in the Curriculum
during summer / winter vacation. In this case the training has to be undergone
continuously for the entire period.
The students may undergo Internship at Research organization / University (after due
22
approval from the Head of the Department) for the period prescribed in the curriculum
during summer / winter vacation, in lieu of Industrial training.
19. Personality and Character development
All students shall enroll, on admission, in any one of the personality and character
development Programmes (the NCC/NSS/NSO/YRC) and undergo training for about 80
hours and attend a camp of about seven days. The training shall include classes on
hygiene and health awareness and also training in first-aid.
• National Cadet Corps (NCC) will have about 20 parades.
• National Service Scheme (NSS) will have social service activities in and around the
College / Institution.
• National Sports Organization (NSO) will have sports, Games, Drills and Physical
exercises.
• Youth Red Cross (YRC) will have activities related to social services in and around
college/institutions.
• YOGA: Students shall practice yoga to improve their physical and mental strength.
• While the training activities will normally be during weekends, the camp will normally be
during vacation period. Every student shall put in a minimum of 75% attendance in the
training and attend the camp compulsorily. The training and camp shall be completed
during the first year of the Programme. However, for valid reasons, the Head of the
Institution may permit a student to complete this requirement in the second year.
20. Discipline
Every student is required to observe disciplined and decorous behavior both inside and
outside the College and not to indulge in any activity which will tend to bring down the
prestige of the Institution. If a student indulges in malpractice in any of the Internal
examination/End semester examination he / she shall be liable for punitive action as
prescribed by the university from time to time.
21. Revision of Regulation and Curriculum
The Institution may from time to time revise, amend or change the Regulations,
examination scheme and syllabi if found necessary.
23
ANNEXURE- I
Additional courses to be studied by the B.Sc. Graduates admitted to III semester B.E.
(R-2019) under lateral entry scheme.
The following two additional courses are prescribed for the B.Sc. Graduates:
a. The first course to be studied either in their III semester or V semester of study.
SL. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P M C
1. Engineering Graphics 1 0 4 100 3
b. The Second course to be studied during the IV or VI semester of their study.

The student can register for any ONE of the following courses as applicable to their
Branch of study.
(i). For Non-Circuit Branches:
2. Basic Electrical & Electronics 4 0 0 100 4
(ii). For Circuit Branches: Engineering

2. Basic Civil & Mechanical Engineering 4 0 0 100 4
24
ANNEXURE – II
B.E. Degree Programmes:
1. B.E. Civil Engineering

2. B.E. Mechanical Engineering
3. B.E. Electrical and Electronics Engineering
4. B.E. Electronics and Communication Engineering
5. B.E. Computer Science and Engineering
ANNEXURE – III
Typical breakdown of Course Representation for UG Degree Programmes:

Suggested Break-up
Sl.No Course Work - Subject Area of Credits
12
1 Humanities and Social Sciences (HS), including Management
Basic Sciences (BS) including Mathematics, Physics, 25
2
Chemistry, Biology
Engineering Sciences (ES), including Materials, 24
Workshop, Drawing, Basics of
3
Electrical/Electronics/Mechanical/Computer Engineering,
Instrumentation
Professional Subjects-Core (PC), relevant to the chosen 48-54
4
specialization/branch
Professional Subjects – Electives (PE), relevant to the 18
5
chosen specialization/ branch
Open Subjects- Electives (OE), from other technical and/or 6-12
6
emerging subject areas
Project Work, Seminar and/or Internship in Industry or 15
7
elsewhere
Mandatory Courses [Environmental Sciences, Induction (non-credit)
8 training, Indian Constitution, Essence of Indian Knowledge
Tradition]
9 Total credits 160 – 165
25

ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY,
KARAIKUDI – 630 003.
(AUTONOMOUS)
Regulation – 2019
Degree of Bachelor Engineering (B.E - Part Time)
The following regulations are applicable to all autonomous under graduate programmes of this
Institute affiliated to Anna University.
1. Preliminary Definitions and Nomenclature.

In these regulations, unless the context otherwise requires
i. „Programme‟ means Degree Programme, that is B.E Degree programme
ii. „Branch‟ means Specialization or discipline of B.E Degree programme like Civil Engineering,
Electrical & Electronics Engg. etc.,
iii. „Course‟ means a theory or practical subject that is normally studied in a semester, like
Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry etc.,
2. ADMISSION PROCEDURE
Candidates seeking admission to the first semester (also known as Bridge semester) of the B.E.
(Part – Time – 7 Semesters) degree programme shall be required to have passed the Diploma in
Engineering / Technology in the relevant branch of specialization awarded by the State Board of
Technical Education, Tamil Nadu or any other authority accepted by the Syndicate of the University
as equivalent thereto.
3. Programmes offered
A candidate may be offered a programme in any one of the branches of study approved by AICTE
and it is offered by this Institution.
The programmes offered by this Institute are given below:
Part-Time B.E. Degree Programmes :
1. B.E. Civil Engineering

2. B.E. Mechanical Engineering
3. B.E. Electrical and Electronics Engineering
4. B.E. Electronics and Communication Engineering
26
4. Structure of the Programme

4.1 Every Programme will have curricula with syllabi consisting of theory and practicals such as :
i. General core courses comprising Mathematics, Basic Sciences, Engineering Sciences,
Humanities and Engineering.
ii. Core courses of Engineering/Technology.
iii. Elective courses for specialization in related fields.
iv. Workshop practice, computer practice, engineering graphics, laboratory work, industrial training,
seminar presentation, project work, educational tours, camps etc.
v. There shall be a certain minimum number of core courses and sufficient number of elective
courses that can be opted by the student. The blend of different courses shall be so designed that
the student, at the end of the programme, would have been trained not only in his / her relevant
professional field but also would have developed as a socially conscious human being.
4.2 Each course is normally assigned certain number of credits.
(i) One lecture period per week : 1 credit
(ii) One tutorial period per week : 1 credit
(iii) Two periods of Laboratory Practical/ : 1 credit
Seminar / project work
(iv) 3 or 4 periods of laboratory Practical : 2 credits
4.3 Each semester curriculum shall normally have a blend of lecture courses not exceeding 5 and
practical courses not exceeding 1. However, the total number of courses per semester shall not
exceed 5.
4.4 For the award of the degree, a student has to earn certain minimum total number of credits
specified in the curriculum of the relevant branch.
4.5 The medium of instruction is English for all courses, examinations, seminar presentations
and project / thesis / dissertation reports.
5. ELIGIBILITY
Candidates seeking admission shall satisfy the following conditions:
(i) Eligibility conditions such as class, marks and number of attempts shall be as
prescribed by the Syndicate of the University from time to time.
(ii) Shall have been employed for at least two years after qualifying for the
Diploma. The period being counted from the academic year in which admission
is sought.
(iii) Notwithstanding the qualifying examination the candidate might have passed
[vide clause 2.1] he/she has a minimum level of proficiency in Mathematics,
Physics, Chemistry and the relevant branch of study as may be prescribed by the
University.
(iv) Shall have employment or work place within a radial zone of 90 Km from the
Institution.
27
(v) Shall have to satisfy the conditions of physical fitness as prescribed by the
Syndicate of the University.
6. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME
6.1 The duration of the programme shall be seven consecutive semesters, spread over 3.5
academic years, (one academic year consisting of 2 semesters). Each semester shall
have a minimum of 75 working days, (evenings) excluding the days of the End-Semester
Examinations. The Head of the Department shall ensure that every teacher imparts
instruction as per the number of periods specified in the syllabus and that the teacher
teaches the full content of the specified syllabus for the course being taught.
6.2 A student is ordinarily expected to complete the B.E. / B.Tech. (Part – time - 7 semesters)
degree programmes in seven semesters (three and half academic years) but in any case
he / she has to complete the course requirements successfully and has to pass the
examinations in all the courses prescribed in the respective curriculum within a maximum
period of 14 Semesters ( 7 academic years ) reckoned from the commencement of the
first semester to which the candidate was admitted. This maximum period shall be 16
semesters in the case of women candidates.
7. BRANCHES OF STUDY
A candidate may be offered, at the time of admission, one of the following branches of
study.
i) B.E. (PT) Civil Engineering
ii) B.E (PT) Mechanical Engineering
iii) B.E (PT) Electrical and Electronics Engineering
iv) B.E.(PT) Electronics and Communication Engineering
8. REQUIREMENT FOR COMPLETION OF A SEMESTER

8.1 A candidate who has fulfilled the following conditions shall be deemed to have satisfied
the requirements for completion of a semester.
Ideally, every student is expected to attend all classes and earn 100% attendance.
However, in order to allow provision for certain unavoidable reasons such as medical
grounds, the student is expected to earn a minimum of at least 75% attendance.
Therefore, he/she shall secure not less than 75% of overall attendance in that semester
taking into account the total number of periods in all courses attended by the candidate
as against the total number of periods in all courses offered during that particular
semester.
8.2 However, a candidate who secures overall attendance between 65% and 75% in one
particular semester due to medical reasons (prolonged hospitalization / accident / specific
illness) may be permitted to appear for that particular semester examinations subject to
the condition that the candidate shall submit the medical certificate attested by the Head
of the Department. The same shall be forwarded to the Controller of Examinations, Anna
28
University, Chennai for record purposes.

8.3 Candidates who could secure less than 65% overall attendance and candidates who do
not satisfy the clauses 6.1 & 6.2 will be prevented from writing the End-Semester
Examinations of that current semester and are not permitted to go to subsequent
academic session. They are required to repeat the incomplete semester in the
subsequent academic year.
9. FACULTY ADVISER
To help the students in planning their courses of study and for general advice on the academic
programme, the Head of the Department will attach a certain class of students to a teacher of
the Department who shall function as Faculty Adviser for those students throughout their
period of study. Such Faculty Advisers shall advise the students and monitor the courses
undergone by the students, check the attendance and progress of the students attached to him/her
and counsel them periodically. If necessary, the faculty adviser may also discuss with or inform
the parents about the progress of the students.
10. CLASS COMMITTEE

10.1. Every class shall have a class committee consisting of teachers handling the class concerned,
student representatives and a chairperson. The objective of the class committee shall monitor
overall goal of improving the teaching-learning process. The functions of the class committee
include:
 Solving problems experienced by students in the class room and in the laboratories.
 Clarifying the regulations of the degree programme and o t h e r d e t a i l s r e l e v a n t t o
academic activity.
 Informing the student representatives o n the details of Regulations regarding weightage used
For each assessment. In the case of practical courses (laboratory / drawing / project work /
Seminar etc.) the breakup of marks for each experiment / exercise / module of work, should be
clearly discussed in the class committee meeting and informed to the students.
 Analyzing the performance of the students of the class after each series test and finding the
ways and means of solving problems, if any.
 Identifying the weak students, if any, and requesting the teachers concerned to provide some
additional help or guidance or coaching to such weak students.
Informing the students about the attendance details of the class at every class committee meeting
and students with shortage of attendance are advised to attend the class regularly.
10.2. The class committee for a class under a particular branch is normally constituted by the Head of the
Department. However, if the students of different branches are mixed in a class (like the first
semester which is generally common to all branches), the class committee is to be constituted by
the Principal / Chief faculty advisor.
29
10.3. The class committee shall be constituted within the first week of each semester.
10.4. At least 4 student representatives (usually 2 boys and 2 girls) shall be included in the class
committee.
10.5. The chairperson of the class committee may invite the Faculty adviser(s) and the Head of the
Department to the meeting of the class committee.
10.6. The Principal may participate in any class committee of the institution.
10.7. The chairperson is required to prepare the minutes of every meeting, submit the same to Principal
within two days of the meeting and arrange to circulate it among the students and teachers
concerned. If there are some points in the minutes requiring action by the Principal, the same shall
be brought to the notice of the Principal.
10.8. The first meeting of the class committee shall be held within one week from the date of
commencement of the semester, in order to inform the students about the nature and weightage
of assessments within the framework of the Regulations. Two or three subsequent meetings may
be held in a semester at suitable intervals. The Class Committee Chairman shall put on the
Notice Board the cumulative attendance particulars of each student at the end of every
such meeting to enable the students to know their attendance details. During these meetings
the student members representing the entire class, shall meaningfully interact and express the
opinions and suggestions of the other students of the class in order to improve the effectiveness of
the teaching-learning process.
11. COURSE COMMITTEE FOR COMMON COURSES
Each common theory course offered to more than one discipline or group, shall have a “Course
Committee” comprising all the teachers teaching the common course with one of them nominated
as Course Coordinator. The nomination of the course Coordinator shall be made by the Head of
the Department / Principal / Chief Faculty Advisor depending upon whether all the teachers
teaching the common course belong to a single department or to several departments. The
„Course committee‟ shall meet in order to arrive at a common scheme of evaluation for the test
and shall ensure a uniform evaluation of the tests. W here ever feasible, the course committee may
also prepare a common question paper for the internal assessment of series test
12. SYSTEM OF EXAMINATION
12.1 Performance in each course of study shall be evaluated based on (i) continuous internal
assessment throughout the semester and (ii) End semester examination.
12.2 Each course, both theory and practical (other than project work) shall be evaluated for a
maximum of 100 marks. The project work shall be evaluated for a maximum of 200 marks.
12.2.1 For all theory and practical courses other than project work, the continuous internal assessment
will carry 30 marks while the End Semester examination will carry 70 marks. Project work may
be allotted to a single student or to a group of students not exceeding 4 per group.
12.2.2 For project work, the continuous internal assessment will carry 30 marks while the End
Semester examination will carry 70 marks (Oral presentation).
30
12.3 The End Semester examination (theory and practical) of 3 hours duration shall ordinarily be
conducted between October and December during the odd semesters and between April and
June during the even semesters.
12.4 The End Semester examination for project work shall consist of evaluation of the final report
submitted by the student or students of the project group (of not exceeding 4 students) by an
external examiner followed by a viva-voce examination conducted separately for each student by
a committee consisting of the external examiner, and an internal examiner.
12.4.1 The project report shall carry a maximum 30 marks (same mark shall be awarded for the report
submitted by every student within the project group) while the viva-voce examination shall carry
70 marks. (Marks are awarded to each student of the project group based on the individual
performance in the viva-voce examination oral presentation).
12.5 For the End Semester examination in both theory and practical courses including project work the
internal and external examiners shall be appointed by the Principal and Chairman, of this institution.
13. PROCEDURE FOR AWARDING MARKS FOR INTERNAL ASSESSMENT

For all theory and practical courses the continuous assessment shall be for a maximum of 30
marks (consisting of 20 marks for tests/experiments and 10 marks for attendance and
assignment) and for project work, the continuous assessment shall be for a maximum of 30
marks.
14.1.(a) Theory Courses

The maximum marks for internal Assessment shall be 30 marks in case of theory courses. Three
tests each carrying 50 marks shall be conducted during the semester by the Department
concerned. The total marks obtained in all 3 tests, put together shall be reduced to 20 marks and
rounded to the nearest integer. The remaining 1 0 marks shall be distributed for three
assignments.
(b) Practical Courses:
Every practical exercise / experiment shall be evaluated based on the exercise / experiment
prescribed as per the syllabi and the records of work done maintained by the students. There shall
be at least one model test f o r p r a c t i c a l during the semester. The criteria for arriving at the
internal assessment marks (30 marks) shall be decided based on the performance of the students
in the model test and all experiments put together and reduced to 30 marks.
(c) Internal Assessment for Theory Courses with Laboratory Component:
The maximum marks for Internal Assessment shall be 30 in case of theory courses with
Laboratory component.
If there is a theory course with Laboratory component, there shall be three tests: the first two tests
(each 50 marks) will be from theory portions and the third test (maximum mark 50) will be from
laboratory component. The sum of marks of first two tests shall be reduced to 10 marks and the
third test mark shall be reduced to 20 marks.
31
14.2 Project Work:

The HO Dshall constitute a review committee for the department concerned for internal evaluation
of project . There shall be three review meetings for assessments during the semester by the
review committee. The student shall make presentation on the progress made by him / her before
the committee. The total marks obtained in the three assessments shall be reduced for 30 marks
and rounded to the nearest integer.
14.3.1 Every teacher is required to maintain an 'ATTENDANCE AND ASSESSMENT RECORD' which
consists of attendance marked in each lecture or practical or project work class, the test marks
and the record of class work (topic covered), for each course. This should be submitted to
the Head of the Department periodically (at least three times in a semester) for checking the
syllabus coverage and the records of test marks and attendance. The Head of the Department will
put his signature and date after due verification and the same may be submitted to the Principal for
monitoring the assessment of the students. The HOD of the concerned department may keep
the document of attendance and class records in safe custody for submission to the
inspection team of NBA / AICTE as and when needed.
15. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPEARING FOR END SEMESTER EXAMINATION

A candidate shall normally be permitted to appear for the End Semester examination of any
semester commencing from I semester if he/she has satisfied the semester completion
requirements (clause 16) and has registered for examination in all courses of the semester.
Registration is mandatory for semester examinations as well as arrears examinations failing
which the candidate will not be permitted to move to the higher semester.
A candidate already appeared for subjects or any subject in a semester and passed the
examination is not entitled to reappear in the same subject or subjects of the semester for
improvement of grades / marks.
16. PASSING REQUIREMENTS

16.1 A candidate who secures not less than 50% of total marks prescribed for the courses with a
minimum of 45% of the marks prescribed for the end-semester Examination in both theory and
practical courses (including Project work), shall be declared to have passed the examination.
The evaluation for the end semester shall be 100 marks.
16.1.1 If a candidate fails to secure a pass in a particular course, it is mandatory that he/she shall
register and reappear for the examination in that course during the subsequent semester when
examination is conducted in that course; he/she should continue to register and reappear for the
examinations in the failed subjects till he / she secures a pass.
16.1.2 The internal assessment marks obtained by the candidate in the first appearance shall be
retained and considered valid for all subsequent examination till the candidate pass the subjects.
32
14. AWARD OF LETTER GRADES
17.1. All assessments of a course will be done on absolute marks basis. However, for the purpose of
reporting the performance of a candidate, letter grades, each carrying certain number of points,
will be awarded as per the range of total marks (out of 100) obtained by the candidate in each
subject as detailed below:
Letter Grade Grade Points Marks range

O (Outstanding) 10 91-100
A+(Excellent) 9 81-90
A(Very Good) 8 71-80
B+(Good) 7 61-70
B(Above Average) 6 50-60
RA (Fail) 0 Less than 50
AB (Absent) 0
I (Prevented) -
W (Withdrawal) -
The Grade “I” denotes inadequate attendance and hence prevention from writing the end
semester examination.
The Grade “I‟ and “W” will figure only in the Result sheets.
Grade sheet
After results are declared, Grade Sheets will be issued to each student which will contain the
following details:
 The name of Institution
 The list of courses enrolled during the semester and the grade scored.
 The Grade Point Average (GPA) for the semester and
 The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of all courses enrolled from first semester
onwards.
GPA is the ratio of the sum of the products of the number of credits of courses enrolled and the
points corresponding to the grades scored in those courses, taken for all the courses, to the sum
of the credits of all courses registered.
GPA = Sum of [ C * GP]

Sum of C
“C” Credits allotted for the subjects.

“GP” Grade points earned.
CGPA will be calculated in a similar manner, considering all the courses enrolled from first
semester.
17.2 REVALUATION
A candidate can apply for revaluation of his/her semester examination answer paper in a theory
33
course, within 2 weeks from the declaration of results, on payment of a prescribed fee through
proper application to the Controller of Examinations th ro u gh th e H e ad of t he
De p ar tm en t . A candidate can apply for revaluation of answer scripts for not exceeding 5
subjects at a time. The Controller of Examinations will arrange for the revaluation and the results
will be intimated in the institution website as well as trough Head of the Department .
Revaluation is not permitted for practical courses, seminars, practical training and for project work.
17.2.1 After the examination results, the students are allowed to apply for photocopy of the answer
script in the relevant subject if the student is willing to apply for the same with prescribed fee.
18. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF THE DEGREE

18.1 A student shall be declared to be eligible for the award of the Degree if he/she satisfies the
following conditions:
 Successfully gained the required number of total credits as specified in the Curriculum
corresponding to his/her Programme within the stipulated time.
 No disciplinary action is pending against him/her.
 The award of the degree must be approved by the Syndicate of the University to which the
Institution is affiliated.
 No dues to the institute, Library and Hostels.
19. CLASSIFICATION OF THE DEGREE AWARDED

19.1 First Class With Distinction:
Candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 15) having passed the
examination in all the courses in his/her first appearance within the specified minimum number of
semesters securing a CGPA of not less than 8.50 shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First Class with Distinction.
Lateral entry candidates have to pass all the six semesters in the first appearance within six
consecutive semesters securing a CGPA of not less than 8.5.
19.2 First Class:

A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide clause 15) having passed the
examination in all the courses within the specified minimum number of semesters plus one year (two
semesters), securing a CGPA of not less than 7.00 shall be declared to have passed the
examination in First Class. For this purpose the withdrawal from examination will not be construed as
an appearance. Further, the authorized break of study (vide clause 18) will not be counted for the
purpose of classification.
Lateral entry candidates have to pass all the subjects in the last six semesters within a maximum
period of eight consecutive semesters from first semester of lateral entry securing a CGPA of not
less than 7.0.
19.3 Second Class:
All other candidates (not covered in clauses 16.1 & 16.2) who qualify for the award of the
34
degree shall be declared to have passed the examination in Second Class.

19.4. A candidate who is absent in semester examination in a course / project work after having
enrolled for the same shall be considered to have appeared in that examination for the purpose of
classification.
20. PROVISION FOR WITHDRAWAL FROM END-SEMESTER EXAMINATION

20.1. A candidate, may for valid reasons and on prior application, be granted permission to withdraw
from appearing for the examination of any one course or consecutive examinations of more than
one course in a semester examination.
20.2. Such withdrawal shall be permitted only once during the entire period of study of the degree
programme.
20.3 Withdrawal application is valid only if it is made within 3 working days prior to the commencement of
the examination in that course or courses and recommended by the Principal.
20.4. Withdrawal shall not be construed as an appearance for the eligibility of a candidate for First
Class with Distinction. This provision is not applicable to those who seek withdrawal during VII
semester.
20.5. Withdrawal from the End semester examination is NOT applicable to arrears subjects of previous
Semesters.
20.6 The candidate shall reappear for the withdrawn courses during the examination conducted in the
subsequent semester.
21. PROVISION FOR AUTHORISED BREAK OF STUDY

21.1 Break of Study shall be granted only once for valid reasons for a maximum of one year
during the entire period of study of the degree programme. However, in extraordinary
situation the candidate may apply for additional break of study not exceeding another one year by
paying prescribed fee for break of study. If a candidate intends to temporarily discontinue the
programme in the middle of the semester for valid reasons, and to rejoin the programme in a
subsequent year, permission may be granted based on the merits of the case provided he / she
applies to the Principal and Chairman well in advance, along with readmission order from
DOTE but not later than the last date for registering for the end semester examination of the
semester.
22.2. The candidate permitted to rejoin the Programme after the break shall be governed by the
Curriculum and Regulations in force at the time of rejoining. If the Regulations is changed,
then, those candidates may have to do additional courses as prescribed by the Principal
and Chairman.
22.3. The authorized break of study (for a maximum of one year) will not be counted for the duration
specified for passing all the courses for the purpose of classification. However, additional break of
study granted will be counted for the purpose of classification.
22.4. The total period for completion of the Programme reckoned from, the commencement of the first
35
semester to which the candidate was admitted shall not exceed the maximum period specified
irrespective of the period of break of study in order that he/she may be eligible for the award of the
degree.
22.5 If any student is detained for want of requisite attendance, progress and good conduct, the period
spent in that semester shall not be considered as permitted „Break of Study‟ or „Withdrawal‟ is
not applicable for this case.
22.6 Once TC issued for any reason during the course of study,he/she is not permitted to rejoin to
course.
36
37
SEMESTER I
38
Alagappa Chettiar Government College of Engineering & Technology, Karaikudi-3

(An Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University Chennai)
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
ANNEXURE - I
Regulations 2019
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI
SEMESTER I
S.N Course
Course Title Category L T P C
o Code
THEORY
1 19ENH11 Communicative English HS 2 0 2 3
2 19MAB12 Mathematics I BS 3 1 0 4
3 19PHB13 Physics: Properties of Materials and Mechanics. BS 3 1 0 4
4 19EEG16 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering ES 4 0 0 4
PRACTICAL
5 19PHL17 Physics Laboratory BS 0 0 3 1.5
6 19MEL18 Workshop Practice Laboratory ES 0 0 4 2
MANDATORY COURSE
7 Induction Programme MC 0
Total Number of Credits 18.5
SEMESTER II
S. Course
Course Title Category L T P C
No Code
THEORY
1 19CHB21 Chemistry BS 3 1 0 4
2 19MAB22 Mathematics II BS 3 1 0 4
3 19CSG23 Python Programming ES 3 0 0 3
4 19MEG24 Engineering Graphics ES 1 0 4 3
PRACTICAL
5 19CHL26 Chemistry Laboratory BS 0 0 3 1.5
6 19CSL27 Python Programming Lab ES 0 0 3 1.5
AUDIT COURSE
7 19SHA01 Professional Communication AC 1 0 2 0
8 19SHA02 Error Analysis and Fundamental Physical
AC 1 0 2 0
Quantities
Total Number of Credits 17
39
19ENH11 : COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH
Category : HS L T P C
2 0 2 3
Course Objectives:
The course is intended to
• Make learners listen to audio files and replicate in speaking context.
• Make learners read widely and practice it in writing.
• Make learners develop vocabulary and strengthen grammatical understanding
Unit- I: 6
Vocabulary Building
The concept of Word Formation - Root words from foreign languages and their use in
English - Acquaintance with prefixes and suffixes from foreign languages in English to form
derivatives - Synonyms, antonyms, and standard abbreviations.
Unit – II 6
Basic Writing Skills
Sentence Structures-Use of phrases and clauses in sentences-Importance of proper
punctuation - Creating coherence - Organizing principles of paragraphs in documents-
Techniques for writing precisely
Unit –III 6
Identifying Common Errors in Writing
Subject-verb agreement - Noun-pronoun agreement - Misplaced modifiers –Articles –
Prepositions – Redundancies - Clichés
Unit –IV 6+6=12

Nature and Style of sensible Writing (6 periods)
Describing – Defining – Classifying - Providing examples or evidence -Writing introduction
and conclusion
Writing practice(6 periods)
Comprehension - Précis Writing - Essay Writing – Job Application Letter and Resume
Unit- V 15 sessions
Listening and Speaking
(This unit involves interactive practice sessions in Language Lab)
• Listening Comprehension
• Pronunciation, Intonation, Stress and Rhythm
• Common Everyday Situations: Conversations and Dialogues
• Interviews and Presentations
40
Suggested Readings:
1. Practical English Usage. Michael Swan. OUP. 1995.
2. Remedial English Grammar. F.T. Wood. Macmillan.2007
3. (iii)On Writing Well. William Zinsser. Harper Resource Book. 2001
4. Study Writing. Liz Hamp-Lyons and Ben Heasly. Cambridge University Press. 2006.
5. Communication Skills. Sanjay Kumar and PushpLata. Oxford University Press. 2011.
6. Exercises in Spoken English. Parts. I-III. CIEFL, Hyderabad. Oxford University
Press
Course Outcome
The student will acquire basic proficiency in English including reading and
listeningcomprehension, writing and speaking skills.
41
19MAB12 : MATHEMATICS –I
(Common to all Branches of B.E)

Category : BS L T P C
3 1 0 4
Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with techniques
in calculus, multivariable analysis and linear algebra. It aims to equip the students with
standard concepts and tools at an intermediate to advanced level that will serve them well
towards tackling more advanced level of mathematics and applications that they would find
useful in their disciplines.
UNIT I MATRICES 12
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem – Diagonalization of matrices –
Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of
quadratic forms.
UNITII DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Representation of functions – Limit of a function – Continuity – Derivatives –Differentiation
rules – Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT III FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12

Partial differentiation – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative –
Change of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s
series for functions of two variables – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables –
Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.
UNIT IV INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12

Definite and Indefinite integrals – Substitution rule – Techniques of Integration – Integration
by parts, Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration of rational
functions by partial fraction, Integration of irrational functions – Improper integrals.
UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar coordinates –
Area enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of solids – Change of variables in
double and triple integrals.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd
Edition, 2014.
2. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2008.
3. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendental", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015.
42
REFERENCES:
1. Anton, H, Bivens, I and Davis, S, "Calculus", Wiley, 10th Edition, 2016.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.
3. N.P. Bali and Dr.Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi
Publications, Ninth Edition,2016
4. Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2011.
5. Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi, 11th
Reprint, 2010.
Course Outcomes:
The students will learn:
CO1: The essential tool of matrices and linear algebra in a comprehensive manner.
CO2: To use both limit definition and rules of differentiation to differentiate functions and
apply differentiation to solve maxima and minima problems.
CO3: To deal with functions of several variables that are essential in most branches of
engineering.
CO4: To evaluate integrals using techniques of integration, such as substitution, partial
fractions and integration by parts.
CO5: The mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals and their usage.
43
19PHB13 : PHYSICS: PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS AND MECHANICS
Common to Civil & Mechanical Engineering

3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES: To enhance the fundamental knowledge in mechanics and properties of
solids, and its applications relevant to their field of engineering. Upon completion of this
course the students will be familiar with:
• Mechanics and Elastic behaviour of solids
• Thermal conduction and applications
• Principles of acoustics, ultrasonic and their industrial applications.
• Origin of quantum physics, Schrödinger’s equation and applications.
• Emerging materials and their applications
UNIT I MECHANICS OF SOLIDS 9 Hours

Elasticity- Hooke’s law-Types of strain-Classification of Modulus of Elasticity- Poisson’s
Ratio - Stress-Strain diagram - Factors affecting elasticity – Moment, Couple and Torque –
Derivation of Twisting Couple on a Cylinder (or wire) - Bending moment –Young’s modulus
by Non-uniform Bending - Depression of a cantilever - Uniform bending - I shaped girders.
UNIT II THERMAL PROPERTIES 9 Hours

Thermal Conductivity – Thermal Diffusivity - Specific Heat Capacity - Rectilinear Flow of
Heat along a Uniform Bar - heat conduction in solids - flow of heat through compound media
(parallel and perpendicular) – Determination of Thermal Conductivity of a Good Conductor
by Forbe’s Method: theory and experiment - Determination of Thermal Conductivity of a
poor Conductor by Lee’s Disc Method: theory and experiment.
UNIT III ACOUSTICS & ULTRASONICS 9 Hours

Classification of sound - loudness and intensity - Weber-Fechner law - standard intensity and
intensity level - decibel - reverberation - reverberation time – Derivation of Sabine’s formula
(Decay and Growth) - Determination of absorption coefficient - factors affecting acoustics of
buildings.
Introduction - properties of ultrasonic waves - production of ultrasonic waves;
Magnetostriction effect- Magnetostriction generator - Piezoelectric effect- Piezoelectric
generator- Acoustic grating - Determination of wavelength and velocity of ultrasonics-
applications
UNIT IV QUANTUM MECHANICS AND APPLICATIONS 9 Hours

Limitations of classical Physics - Introduction to Quantum theory - Dual nature of matter and
radiation- de-Broglie wavelength in terms of voltage, energy and temperature –Heisenberg’s
Uncertainty principle – verification – physical significance of a wave function- Schrödinger’s
Time independent and Time dependent wave equations –- Particle in a one dimensional
potential well.
UNIT V MODERN ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9 Hours

Metallic glasses- preparation of metallic glasses - properties – applications of the metallic
glasses - Shape Memory Alloys (SMA) - Characteristics, properties of NiTi alloy -
44
applications of SMA - advantages and disadvantages of SMA - Nanomaterials-synthesis –

chemical vapour deposition – Sol Gel – ball Milling – properties of nanoparticles and
applications of nanoparticles.
Total 45 Hours
TEXT BOOKS
1. S. H. Crandall, N. C. Dahl & T. J. Lardner, An Introduction to the Mechanics of
Solids, 2nd ed. with SI Units.,McGraw –Hill 2000.
2. P.K.Palanisamy-Engineering Physics-I Scitech publications (India) pvt. Ltd 3
edition, 2015.
REFERENCES
1. J. L. Meriam,Engineering Mechanics: Statics, 7th ed. Wiley 2012.
2. Arumugam M- Engineering Physics, Anuradha Publishers, 2010.
3. EP Popov, Engineering Mechanics of Solids, Prentice Hall, 1990.
4. Avadhanulu M. N. and Kshirsagar P. G., Engineering Physics, S.Chand and
Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Dr. Jayakumar .S, Materials Science,R. K. Publishers, 2008.
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the students will be able to
CO1: Acquire knowledge in solid mechanics and properties of matter with its applications
CO2: Acquire knowledge in thermal physics [Application]
CO3: Familiarization on acoustics of building and generation and application of ultrasonic
waves
CO4: Analyze the dual nature of matter using Heisenberg's Uncertainty principle,
Schrodinger's time independent and dependent wave equations.[Assessment]
CO5: Exposing the properties and applications of modern engineering materials [Familiarity
& Application]
45
19EEG16 : BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
(For Civil and Mechanical branches only)

Category : ES L T P C
4 0 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course students will be able:
• To understand the basic law concepts in AC & DC circuits.
• To explain the working principle, construction, applications of DC machines, AC
machines & measuring instruments.
• To Gain knowledge about the fundamentals of digital electronic system.
• To impart basic knowledge of communication engineering.
UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND MEASURMENTS 12

Ohm’s Law – Kirchhoff’s Laws – Steady State Solution of DC Circuits – Introduction to AC
Circuits – Waveforms and RMS Value – Power and Power factor – Single Phase and Three
Phase Balanced Circuits. Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron Instruments
(Ammeters and Voltmeters), Dynamometer type Watt meters.
UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES 12

Construction, Principle of Operation, Basic Equations and Applications of DC Generators,
DC Motors, Single Phase Transformer, single phase induction Motor. (Quantitative Approach
only)
UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 12

Characteristics of PN Junction Diode – Zener Diode and its Characteristics, Applications –
Photodiode-Half wave and Full wave Rectifiers. Bipolar Junction Transistor – CB, CE, CC
Configurations and Characteristics- FET Characteristics.
UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 12

Binary Number System – Logic Gates – Boolean algebra: Laws and Theorems-
Combinational Circuits: Adder, Subtractor. Sequential Circuits: Flip-Flops (SR,JK,D,T) –
A/D and D/A Conversion (simple concepts).
UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 12

Types of Signals: Analog and Digital Signals – Modulation and Demodulation: Principles of
Amplitude and Frequency Modulations. Communication Systems : Satellite and Optical Fiber
(Block Diagram Approach only)- Super Heterodyne- receiver.
Total: 60 Periods
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mittle V.N., “Basic Electrical Engineering”, TMH Edition, New Delhi, 1990.
2. Sedha, R.S., “Applied Electronics” S. Chand and Co., 2006.
46
REFERENCES
1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraleedharan K A, “Basic
Electrical,Electronics and Computer Engineering”, TMH, Second Edition, (2006).
2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford press
(2005).
3. Mehta V K, “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand and Company Ltd, (1994).
4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline
Series,McGraw Hill,(2002).
5. Premkumar N, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Anuradha Publishers, (2003).
6. Morris Mano, ”Digital Design”, Pearson Education, 2006.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Gain knowledge in solving Basic Electric Circuit using Ohm’s Law and Kirchhoff’s
Laws. and Gain knowledge about the various instruments required in electrical
quantitymeasurements.
CO2: Illustrate the working principle of Electrical D.C and A.C Generator, Motors and
Transformers.
CO3: Characterize semiconductors, Diodes, Rectifiers and Transistors.
CO4: Understand binary Number System, logic Gates and Boolean algebra to explain
digitalelectronics systems.
CO5: Elucidate the fundamental principles and concepts involved in
electronicCommunication.
47
19PHL17 : PHYSICS LABORATORY

(Common to all branches)
0 0 3 1.5
Objectives: To have a practical knowledge about the concepts of physics and its applications
in the emerging fields of engineering and technology
List of Experiments:
1. Spectrometer - Diffraction Grating Normal Incidence Method.
2. Air Wedge –Determination thickness of a wire.
3. Young’s Modulus – Non Uniform Bending Method.
4. Young’s Modulus – Uniform Bending Method.
5. Ammeter and Voltmeter Calibration – Low Range.
6. Determination of Bandgap Energy of Semiconductor.
7. Ultrasonic Interferometer - Velocity of sound & Compressibility of liquids.
8. Torsional pendulum –Determination of Rigidity Modulus & Moment of Inertia.
9. Compound Pendulum – Determination of acceleration due to gravity.
10. Melde’s string- Determination of frequency of a.c source.
11. B.H. curve of a ferromagnetic material.
12. Carey Foster’s Bridge- Determination of specific resistance of the material of the wire.
13. Spectrometer- Determination of dispersive power of a Prism.
14. 14 Lee’s disc - Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
15. Newton’s Rings – Radius of curvature of a lens.
16. Determination of Plank’s constant (Photo electric effect).
17. Determination of viscosity of liquid – poiseuille’s method.
REFERENCE:
1. Marsh W. White, Kenneth V. Manning, Robert L. Weber, R. Orin Cornett, Practical
Physics, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc. New York and London, 1943.
2. William Watson,A text-book of practical physics, Longmans, Green, and Co. Mumbai
1913.
3. Dieter Meschede, Optics,Light & Lasers: The Practical Approach to Modern Aspects
of Photonics and Laser Physics Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co KGaA, 2004.
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this practical classes, students will be able to
CO1. Determine all physical properties of matter.
CO2. Calibrate electrical measuring instruments and thereby effectively using it for
particular application.
CO3. Understand principle of Laser diffraction and its application in particle size
determination
CO4. Understand the concept of light propagation through optical fibers and
determination of its parameters
CO5. Determine the Intrinsic characteristic features of electronic devices for electrical
and electronic applications.
CO6. Understand the ultrasonic wave propagation in liquids and the determination of
compressibility of liquids for engineering applications
48
19MEL18 : WORKSHOP PRACTICE LABORATORY
(Common to all branches of Engineering)

0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES
Toprovideexposuretothestudentswithhands onexperienceonvariousbasic
engineeringpracticesinCivil,Mechanical,Electricaland ElectronicsEngineering.
GROUPA(CIVIL&MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 9
Plumbing: Practice of Internal threading, external threading, pipe bending, and pipe fitting,
Pipes with coupling for same diameter and with reducer for different diameters and Practice
of T-fitting, Y-fitting, Gate valves fitting
Carpentry: Study of Carpentry Tools, Equipment and different joints, Practice of Tee Joint,
Cross Half lap joint, Dovetail joint and Mortise Tenon Joint.
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13
Welding: Introduction, Study of Tools and welding Equipment (Gas and Arc welding),
Selection of welding electrode and current, Practice of Butt Joint, Lap Joint and Tee Joint.
Sheet Metal: Introduction, Study of sheet metal tools, Practice of Forming & Bending and
Model making of Trays, Cone and Funnels.
Demonstration on:
Foundry Trade: Introduction to foundry, Patterns, pattern allowances, ingredients of
moulding sand and melting furnaces. Foundry tools and their purposes, Demo of mould
preparation and Practice – Preparation of mould by using split pattern.
GROUPB (ELECTRICAL&ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 10
a) Residentialhousewiringusingswitches,fuse, indicator, lampandenergy meter.
b) Fluorescentlampwiring.
c) Staircasewiring
d) Measurementof electrical quantities –voltage,current,power&power factor inRLCcircuit.
e) Measurementofenergyusingsingle phaseenergymeter.
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 13

a)Study ofElectroniccomponentsandequipments.
b)Studyof logic gatesAND,OR,XORand NOT.
c)Study of CRO.
d)Solderingpractice–ComponentsDevicesandCircuits–Usinggeneral purposePCB.
e)MeasurementofripplefactorofHWRandFWR.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Jeyachandran K., Natarajan S. & Balasubramanian S., “A Primer on Engineering
Practices Laboratory,” Anuradha Publications, 2007.
2. Jeyapoovan T., Saravanapandian M. & Pranitha S., “Engineering Practices Lab Manual,”
Vikas Puplishing House Pvt.Ltd, 2006.
49
3. Bawa H.S., “Workshop Practice,” Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited,
2007.
4. Rajendra Prasad A. & Sarma P.M.M.S, “Workshop Practice,” Sree Sai Publication,
2002.
5. Kannaiah P. & Narayana K.L., “Manual on Workshop Practice,” SciTech Publications,
1999.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1. Students will be able understand different types of joints and fittings used in carpentry
and plumbing works.
CO2. Students will be able to prepare metal joints, make simple parts using sheet metals
and prepare moulds for casting.
CO3. Students will get knowledge about different types of wiring and electrical quantity
measuring instruments.
CO4. Students will get knowledge about different types of
Electroniccomponentsandequipments and its applications.
50
51
SEMESTER - II
52
19CHB21 : CHEMISTRY
(Common to ALL Branches)

3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVE:
• To introduce the basic chemistry concepts relevant to different branches of Engineering
and Technology
UNIT-I Water Treatment 9

Water- Hardness of water- Types- CaCO3 equivalent- Alkalinity – Types – Estimation of
alkalinity Estimation of total hardness by EDTA method- Problems- Boiler feed water- -
Sludge and Scale - Caustic embrittlement - Priming and foaming- Treatment of water -
Internal Conditioning – External Conditioning - Demineralisation process - Zeolite process -
Ion-exchange resin process - Desalination- Electrodialysis and Reverse osmosis- Domestic
water treatment.
UNIT-II Basics of Electrochemistry 9

Electrochemistry – Definitions -Type of cells - Reversible and Irreversible cell- Electrolytic
and Electrochemical cell - Standard Electrode potential - Electrochemical series - Nernst
equation – Problems - Reference electrodes - Standard Hydrogen electrode, Calomel
electrode, glass electrode and measurement of pH – Potentiometric and Conductometric
titrations.
UNIT-III Corrosion & Energy Storage Devices 9

Corrosion- Chemical corrosion and electrochemical corrosion- Mechanism- Pilling-Bedworth
rule- Galvanic corrosion- Differential aeration corrosion- Corrosion control methods-
Cathodic protection method-Sacrificial anode method – Impressed cathodic current method-
Corrosion inhibitors.
Batteries- Introduction - Primary and secondary batteries - Dry cells - Alkaline batteries,
Lead acid storage cell - Nickel- Cadmium cell - Lithium battery - Fuel cell - Advantages and
limitations of Fuel cells.
UNIT-IV Fuels and Combustion 9

Combustion- Gross and Net calorific value - Coal- Proximate and Ultimate analysis- Coke
manufacture- Otto- Hoffman method- Characteristics of metallurgical coke- Synthetic Petrol-
Bergius and Fischer- Tropsch method- Knocking- Octane number- Cetane number-
Production, Composition and Uses of Producer and Water gas- Theoretical calculation of
calorific values- problems- Calculation of minimum requirement of air- problems- Flue gas
analysis- Orsat’s apparatus.
UNIT-V Analytical Techniques 9

Beer-Lambert’s law- Estimation of iron by colorimetry- UV-Visible spectroscopy- Block
Diagram-. Principles and instrumentation - IR spectroscopy- Principles and instrumentation
and Applications of Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy (AAS)- Quantitative estimation of
Nickel by AAS - Flame photometry - Theory and instrumentation –Estimation of sodium by
flame photometry.
53
Text Book:
1. Jain P.C and Monika Jain, Physical Chemistry for Engineers, Dhanpat Rai & Sons,
New Delhi 2010
2. Jain P.C and Renuka Jain, Physical Chemistry for Engineers, Dhanpat Rai &
Sons,New Delhi 2010.
3. Puri B.R., Sharma L.R. and Madhan S.Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry,
Shoban Lal Nagin Chand & Co., Jalandhar, 2010.
References:
1. Puri B.R., Sharma L.R. and Madhan S.Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemsitry,
Shoban Lal Nagin Chand & Co., Jalandhar, 2010
2. B.K. Sharma, Engineering Chemistry, Krishna Prakasan Media Pvt Ltd, Meerut
(2010)
Course Outcomes
On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to
CO1. Identify the properties of water and its treatment methods (Understand)
CO2. Summarize the principles and instrumentations of spectroscopic techniques
(Understand)
CO3. Analyze the potentiometric and conductometric methods (Apply)
CO4. Adapt the suitable corrosion control methods (Apply)
CO5. Get Knowledge in fuels(Understand)
54
19MAB22 : MATHEMATICS –II
(Common to all branches of B.E)

3 1 0 4
Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with techniques
in vector differentiation and integration, ordinary differential equations and complex
variables. Laplace transform can be used for efficiently solving the problems that occur
various branches of engineering disciplines. It aims to equip the students to deal with
advanced level of mathematics and applications that would be essential for their disciplines.
UNIT I DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients – Method of variation of
parameters – Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type – System of simultaneous
linear differential equations with constant coefficients – Method of undetermined
coefficients.
UNIT II VECTOR CALCULUS 12

Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl – Vector identities – Irrotational
and Solenoidal vector fields – Line integral over a plane curve – Surface integral – Area of a
curved surface – Volume integral – Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems –
Verification and application in evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 12

Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian and polar
coordinates – Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function –
Conformal mapping – Mapping by functions, – Bilinear transformation.
UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12

Line integral – Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and
Laurent’s series – Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue
theorem for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour.
UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 12

Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function
and unit impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives
and integrals – Initial and final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem –
Transform of periodic functions – Application to solution of linear second order ordinary
differential equations with constant coefficients.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd
Edition, 2014.
2. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,
2008.
55
3. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10th
Edition, New Delhi, 2016. 27
REFERENCES :
1. Bali N., Goyal M. and Watkins C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Firewall
Media (An imprint of Lakshmi Publications Pvt., Ltd.,), New Delhi, 7th Edition, 2009.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa
Publications, New Delhi , 3rd Edition, 2007.
4. O’Neil, P.V. “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd,
New Delhi, 2007.
5. Wylie, R.C. and Barrett, L.C., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics “Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
Course Outcomes:
The students will learn:
CO1. The effective mathematical tools for the solutions of differential equations that model
physical processes.
CO2. About vector differentiation and vector integration which are essential for application
of to Engineering problems.
CO3. The ideas of analytic functions with their properties and conformal mappings with
examples that have direct application.
CO4. The basics of complex integration and contour integration which are useful for
evaluation of certain real integrals
CO5. To understand the method of solving differential equations of certain types that might
be encountered in their engineering studies.
56
19CSG23 : PYTHON PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
• To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving
• To read and write simple Python programs.
• To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
• To define Python functions and call them.
• To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries.
• To do input/output with files in Python.
UNIT I ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING 9 Hours

Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (statements, state, control flow, functions),
notation (pseudo code, flow chart, programming language), algorithmic problem solving,
simple strategies for developing algorithms (iteration, recursion). Illustrative problems: find
minimum in a list, insert a card in a list of sorted cards, guess an integer number in a range,
Towers of Hanoi. (Algorithms only).
UNIT II BASICS OF PYTHON PROGRAMMING 9 Hours

Introduction-Python Interpreter-Interactive and script mode -Values and types, operators,
expressions, statements, precedence of operators, Multiple assignments, comments.
Conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained conditional (if-else)-Iteration-while, for, break,
continue, pass - Simple related programs.
UNIT III FUNCTIONS AND STRINGS 9 Hours

Functions - Introduction, inbuilt functions, user defined functions, passing parameters, return
values, recursion, Lambda functions. Strings-String slices, immutability, string methods and
operations- related programs.
UNIT IV LISTS, TUPLES, AND DICTIONARIES 9 Hours

Lists-creating lists, list operations, list methods, mutability, aliasing, cloning lists, list and
strings, list and functions-list processing-list comprehension. Tuples-Tuple assignment,
Operations on Tuples, lists and tuples, Tuple as return value- Dictionaries-operations and
methods, Nested Dictionaries – related programs.
UNIT V FILES, MODULES, PACKAGES 9 Hours

Files and Exception-Text files, reading and writing files, format Operator-Modules Python
Modules-Creating own Python Modules-packages, Introduction to exception handling-
related Programs.
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Ashok Namdev Kamthane, Amit Ashok Kamthane, “Programming and Problem Solving
with Python” , Mc-Graw Hill Education,2018.
57
2. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist‘‘, 2nd
edition, Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O‘Reilly Publishers, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in
Python: An Inter-disciplinary Approach”, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd.,
2016.
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, ―An Introduction to Python – Revised and
updated for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
Course Outcomes:
CO1. To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving – problem types – Development of
Algorithms and Flowcharts.
CO2. To read and write simple Python programs with conditionals and loops.
CO3. To develop Python programs with functions and call them- syntax and strings.
CO4. To use Python data structures –- lists, tuples, dictionaries – fundamentals and
programs.
CO5. To do input/output with files in Python.
58
19MEG24 : ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
(For Civil, Mechanical and EEE)

1 0 4 3
Objectives
Engineering is the field of science which needs conceptualization and its visualization for
developing newer products. To impart these skills, the students are to be trained from the
fundamental principles of geometrical construction and projections.
This subject of Engineering Graphics aims at helping the students to:
• Review the basics concepts of Geometrical Construction.
• Learn and adopt the standards of Technical Drawing.
• Realize the purpose of Engineering Graphics as a tool for communicating technical
ideas.
• Learn the fundamentals of orthographic projections.
• Acquire the knowledge of development of surfaces .
• Represent the three dimensional views of objects in 2-D planes.
Introductory sessions: Drawing instruments and accessories, BIS – SP 46. Standard sized
drawing sheets, pencils, Lettering and type of lines. 3
Unit 1 GEOMETRICAL CONSTRUCTIONSANDENGINEERING CURVES 6
Construction of - circles, external and internal tangents of circles, inscribing and
circumscribing circles in equilateral triangle, square, rhombus, regular polygons - pentagon,
hexagon and octagon.
Classification and application of Engineering Curves, Construction of Conics, Cycloidal
Curves, Involutes and Spirals along with normal and tangent to each curve.
Unit II ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS 9

Orthographic projection – principles, Principal planes, Projection of points, Projection of
straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method and
traces.Projection of planes (polygons and circle) - inclined to one reference plane and with
both reference planes, concept of auxiliary plane method for projections of the plane.
Unit III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 9

Classification of solids, Projections of solids (Cylinder, Cone, Pyramid and Prism) with the
axis inclined to one reference plane
Unit IV SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES 9

Projection of regular solids sectioned using one cutting plane which is parallel or inclined to
one reference plane and perpendicular to the other plane. Development of surfaces of prisms,
pyramids cylinder and right circular cone
Unit V ISOMETRIC PROJECTION AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION 9

Isometric projection and views of planes and regular solids - Prisms,Pyramids and Cylinders
Perspective projection of simple solids - Prisms,Pyramids and Cylinders by visual ray
method.
59
Total : 45 Hrs
Text Books
1. Bhatt, N. D. and Panchal, V.M., ‘Engineering Drawing’, Pub. Charotar Publishing
House, 2010.
2. Natarajan, K. V., ’A text book of Engineering Graphics’, Pub. Dhanalakshmi Publishers,
Chennai, 2006.
Reference Books
1. Venugopal, K. and Prabhu Raja, V., ‘Engineering Drawing and Graphics + AutoCAD’,
Pub.:New Age International, 2009.
2. Jolhe, D. A., ‘Engineering drawing’, Pub.: Tata McGraw Hill, 2008
3. Shah, M. B. and Rana, B. C., ‘Engineering Drawing’, Pub.: Pearson Education, 2009.
4. Trymbaka Murthy, S., ‘Computer Aided Engineering Drawing’, Pub.: I.K. International
Publishing House, 2009.
Course Outcome
After learning the course the students should be able to
CO1. Draw engineering curves for given specification.
CO2. Perceive and draw the different views of orthographic projections of objects using the
concepts of first angle projection.
CO3. Apply the knowledge of development of surfaces for fabricating the hollow regular
CO4. geometrical shaped objects.
CO5. Create the three dimensional view of objects using the concepts of isometric
projection and perspective projection.
60
19CHL26 : CHEMISTRY LAB

(For all branches)
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES
The course is aimed at imparting knowledge of experimental techniques which would be
useful for students to apply the practical principles of Chemistry relevant to conventional
engineering field.
List of Experiments :
1. Estimation of Hardness by EDTA method.
2. Estimation of Chloride by Argentometric method.
3. Conductometric titration of mixture of Strong Acid and Weak Acid using Strong Base.
4. Estimation of HCl by pH titration.
5. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen.
6. Estimation of Iron by Spectrophotometer.
7. Potentiometric titration of Ferrous iron by dichromate.
8. Determination of the Rate Constant of reaction by Spectrophotometry.
(Any Five Experiments)
REFERENCES:
1 A.O.Thomas, Practical Chemistry, Scientific Book Centre, Cannanore, 2003.
2 Vogel’s Text book of quantitative analysis, Jeffery G H, Basset J. Menthom J, Denney
R.C., 6th edn, EBS, 2009.
3 ChemistryLaboratory Manual, Department of the Chemistry, Alagappa Chettiar
Govt.College of Engineering and Technology, Karaikudi - 630003
OUTCOMES
Students will be able to
CO1. Understand the nature of hardness, chloride level, pollution level using dissolved
oxygen content, iron present in water and analyse them in water.
CO2. Apply the EMF and conductometric measurements in quantitative analysis of
substances.
61
19CSL27 :PYTHON PROGRAMMING LAB
0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
• To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
• To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
• Use functions for structuring Python programs.
• Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, dictionaries.
• Read and write data from/to files in Python.
LIST OF PROGRAMS (Sample list given below)

1. Implement simple python programs using interactive and script mode.
2. Develop python programs using id() and type() functions .
3. Implement range() function in python.
4. Implement various control statements in python.
5. Develop python programs to perform various string operations like concatenation,
slicing, Indexing.
6. Demonstrate string functions using python.
7. Implement user defined functions using python.
8. Compute the GCD of two numbers.
9. Find the square root of a number (Newton‘s method).
10. Exponentiation (power of a number).
11. Find the maximum of a list of numbers.
12. Linear search and Binary search.
13. First n prime numbers.
14. Develop python programs to perform operations on list.
15. Programs that take command line arguments (word count)
16. Implement dictionary in python.
17. Develop programs to work with Tuples.
18. Create programs to solve problems using various data structures in python.
19. Implement python program to perform file operations.
20. Implement python programs using modules and packages.
62
19SHA01 : PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION
Category : Audit L T P C
1 0 2 0
Objectives:
• Develop communication skills particularly Speaking and Listening
• Employ soft skills and develop their personality
UNIT I Listening and speaking practice in Communicative Functions 6

Introductions and meetings – Talking about studies and/ or job – Expressing likes and
dislikes – Describing daily routines and current activities – Talking about past states and
events – Talking about future plans and intentions – Expressing preferences – Giving reasons
– Expressing opinions, agreement and disagreement – Seeking and giving advice – Making
suggestions
UNIT II Speaking 6
Making an oral presentation – Preparing the presentation – Performing the presentation –
Beginning– Language – Visual aids and body language – Voice – Ending – Questions
UNIT III Speaking and Writing 6

E mail – Memo- Report writing - Group Discussion and Interview - English proficiency
exams - BEC – TOEFL- IELTS.
UNIT IV Soft skills (1) 6

Preparing for and dealing with change – Motivation, goal-setting and self-esteem – Managing
time and stress – Career and life planning – Team work – Leadership traits
UNIT V Soft skills (2) 6

Multiple Intelligences – Learning Styles and Personality typing – Critical and creative
thinking – People, cultures and self – Intercultural Communication
List of activities that are to be carried out:

• Listening and speaking practice exercises with communicative functions.
• Practice with more advanced communicative functions.
• Making an oral presentation in English.
• Giving an exposure to and practice with model group discussion and interviews.
• Completing the steps involved in Career, Life Planning and Change Management.
• Setting goals and objectives exercises.
• Prioritizing and time planning exercises.
• Taking a Personality Typing/ Psychometric Test
• Improving body language with pictures.
References and Text books

1. Kamalesh Sadanand and Susheela Punitha, “Spoken English: A Foundation Course” for
Speakers of Indian Languages, Part 2 Audio CD, Hyderabad: Orient Longman, 2008
2. Malcome Goodale, “Professional Presentations”, (VCD) New Delhi: Cambridge
University Press, 2005
3. Barbara Garside and Tony Garside, Essential Telephoning in English (Audio CD),
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002
4. Hari Mohan Prasad and Rajnish Mohan, How to Prepare for Group Discussion and
Interview (Audio Cassette) Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
5. International English Language Testing System Practice Tests, CUP
6. Business English Certificate Materials, Cambridge University Press
63
7. Personality Development (CD-ROM), Times Multimedia, Mumbai

8. Interactive Multimedia Programs on Managing Time and Stress
9. Robert M. Sherfield and et al “Developing Soft Skills” 4th edition, New Delhi: Pearson
Education, 2009
Outcomes:
• At the end of the course the students will be able to take part in group discussions
actively.
• At the end of the course the students will be able to attend interview with a good
perception of what is expected of them.
• The students will be equipped with the interpersonal skills and would know how to
conduct themselves in various situations.
64
19SHA02 : ERROR ANALYSIS AND FUNDAMENTAL PHYSICAL QUANTITIES
Category :Audit L T P C
1 0 2 0
OBJECTIVES: To enhance the fundamental knowledge in error analysis and the
measurement of fundamental physical quantities relevant to their field of engineering.
UNIT I STATISTICAL TREATMENT OF DATA 9 Hours

Introduction to errors, Significant Figures, Accuracy and Precision - Error Definitions -
Round-off errors - Taylor Series - Error propagation: Functions of a Single Variable,
Functions of more than one Variable - Total numerical errors, blunders, formulation
errors,and data uncertainty.
UNIT II Measurement of length, weight and density 8 Hours

Standards of length - Vernier, screw gauge, travelling microscope. The balance - weighing by
the method of oscillation and to compare the length of the arms of the balance. Density -
Measurement of the density of a solid heavier than water by the method of Archimedes.
Measurement of the density of a solid lighter than water. Measurement of the density of a
liquid with specific gravity bottle. Hare's apparatus for the comparison of the densities of
liquids - Hydrometer.
UNIT III Measurement of current, voltage and resistance 8 Hours

Voltmeter, ammeter, galvanometer - lamp and scale method, scale and telescope method –
types of galvanometers. Resistance measurements - Wheatstone bridge-measurement of
resistance of a galvanometer – Carey Foster bridge – measurement of low and high
resistances – variation of resistance with temperature.
Total 25 Hours
REFERENCES
1. Steven C. Chapra and Raymond P. Canale Numerical Methods for Engineers, 7th
edition, McGraw Hill Publications, 2015.
2. William Watson, a text-book of practical physics Longmans, Green, and Co. 1913
3. B. L. Worsnop and H. T. Flint Advanced Practical Physics for Students Methuen
&Co. Ltd. 1931
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course the students will
CO1: Acquire basic knowledge in errors and error propagation.
CO2: Acquire knowledge on the measurement of length, weight and density
CO3: Acquire knowledge on the measurement of current, voltage and resistance
65
ALAGAPPA CHETTIAR GOVERNMENT COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING &

TECHNOLOGY, KARAIKUDI-03
(A Government Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
B.E. (FULL TIME) - MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM and SYLLABUS
REGULATION-2019
66
67
CURRICULUM - 2019
68
Credit Distribution
CREDITS
NO.OF TOTAL
S.NO. CATEGORY SUGGESTED
SUBJECTS CREDITS
(AICTE)
1 Humanities and Social Sciences (HSC) 4 12 12
2 Basic Sciences (BSC) 8 25 26
3 Engineering sciences (ESC) 9 24 21.5
4 Professional Core (PCC) 22 48 55.5
5 Professional Electives (PEC) 6 18 18
6 Open Electives (OEC) 5 18 15
7 Project 2 15 13
Total 56 160 161
I. Semester-wise structure of curriculum

[L= Lecture, T = Tutorials, P = Practical’s& C = Credits]
Semester I (First year) Branch/Course Mechanical Engineering
Sl. Category Code Course Title L T P C

No.
1 HSC 19ENH11 Communicative English 2 0 2 3
2 BSC 19MAB12 Mathematics–I 3 1 0 4
Physics :Properties of Materials and

3 BSC 19PHB13 3 1 0 4
Mechanics
Basic Electrical and Electronics
4 ESC 19EEG16 4 0 0 4
Engineering
5 BSC 19PHL17 Physics Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
6 ESC 19MEL18 Workshop Practice Laboratory 0 0 4 2
7 MC Induction Program Noncredit course(NC)
Total Credits = 18.5
69
Semester II (First year) Branch/Course Mechanical Engineering

No.
1 BSC 19CHB21 Chemistry 3 1 0 4
2 BSC 19MAB22 Mathematics –II 3 1 0 4
3 ESC 19CSG23 Python Programming 3 0 0 3
4 ESC 19MEG24 Engineering Graphics 1 0 4 3
5 BSC 19CHL26 Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
6 ESC 19CSL27 Python Programming Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
Total Credits = 17
70
Semester III (Second year) Branch/Course Mechanical Engineering

No.
Partial Differential Equation & Numerical
1 BSC 19MAB32 3 1 0 4
Methods
2 BSC 19MEB32 Engineering Materials &Metallurgy 3 0 0 3
3 ESC 19MEG31 Applied Mechanics 3 0 0 3
4 PCC 19MEC31 Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
PCC
5 19MEC32 Fluid Mechanics 3 0 0 3
PCC
6 19MEC33 Manufacturing Technology - I 3 0 0 3
7 ESC 19MEL31 Machine Drawing Practice* 0 0 4 2
8 ESC 19MEL32 Manufacturing Technology -I Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
9 MC 19MEM31 Yoga for Human Excellence Noncredit course(NC)
*- Practical Examination to be conducted for four hour duration
71
Semester IV (Second year) Branch/Course Mechanical Engineering

No.
1 PCC 19MEC41 Mechanics of Solids 3 0 0 3
2 PCC 19MEC42 Theory of Machines - I 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 19MEC43 Thermal Engineering 3 0 0 3
4 PCC 19MEC44 Manufacturing Technology - II 3 0 0 3
5 HSC 19MEH41 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3
6 PEC 19MEEXX Professional Elective I 3 0 0 3
Mechanics of solid and Metallurgy

7 PCC 19MEL41 0 0 3 1.5
Laboratory
8 PCC 19MEL42 Thermal Engineering Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
9 ESC 19MEL43 Manufacturing Technology –II Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
72
Semester V (Third year) Branch/Course Mechanical Engineering

No.
1 PCC 19MEC51 Design of Machine Elements 3 0 0 3
2 PCC 19MEC52 Theory of Machines-II 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 19MEC53 Fluid Machinery 3 0 0 3
4 HSC 19MEH51 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3
5 PEC 19MEEXX Professional Elective - II 3 0 0 3
6 PEC 19MEEXX Professional Elective - III 3 0 0 3
7 OEC 19MEPXX Open Elective - I 3 0 0 3
8 PCC 19MEL51 Theory of Machines Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
9 PCC 19MEL52 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
10 MC 19CEZ51 Soft Skill Employment Training Noncredit course(NC)
Total Credits = 24
73
Semester VI (Third year) Branch/Course Mechanical Engineering

No.
PCC 19MEC61 Design of Mechanical Drives 3 0 0 3
1
PCC 19MEC62 Heat and Mass Transfer 3 0 0 3

2
PCC 19MEC63 Mechatronics 3 0 0 3

3
HSC 19MEH61 Operational Research 3 0 0 3
4
PEC 19MEEXX Professional Elective - IV 3 0 0 3

5
OEC 19MEPXX Open Elective - II 3 0 0 3

6
Project 19MEZ61
7 Design and Fabrication Project 0 0 6 3
PCC 19MEL61 Heat and Mass Transfer Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5

8
PCC 19MEL62 Automation Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5

9
Total Credits = 24
74
Semester VII (Fourth year) Branch/Course: Mechanical Engineering

No.
PCC 19MEC71 Engineering Metrology and Measurement 3 0 0 3
1
PEC 19MEEXX Professional Elective -V 3 0 0 3

2
OEC 19MEPXX Open Elective - III 3 0 0 3

3
OEC 19MEPXX Open Elective - IV 3 0 0 3

4
Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis

PCC 19MEL71 1 0 4 3
5
Laboratory*
Engineering Metrology and
PCC 19MEL72 Measurements 0 0 3 1.5

6
Laboratory
7 MC 19CHM31 Environmental Science and Engineering Noncredit course(NC)
75
Semester VIII (Fourth year) Branch/Course Mechanical Engineering

No.
1 PEC 19MEEXX Professional Elective - VI 3 0 0 3
2 OEC 19MEPXX Open Elective - V 3 0 0 3
3 Project 19MEZ81 Project work 0 0 20 10
Total Credits = 16
LIST OF PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES
Sl. Code Course Title L T P C

No.
DESIGN
19MEE01 Computer Aided Design
1 3 0 0 3
19MEE02 Hydraulics and Pneumatics
2 3 0 0 3
19MEE03 Design of Pressure Vessels
3 3 0 0 3
19MEE04 Design of Production Tooling 3 0 0 3
4
19MEE05 Mechanical Vibrations 3 0 0 3
5
19MEE06 Micro Electro and Mechanical System 3 0 0 3
6
(MEMS)
19MEE07 3 0 0 3
7 Plastics Engineering and Technology
19MEE08 3 0 0 3
8 Design of Electric Vehicles
19MEE09 3 0 0 3
9 Advanced Strength of Materials
19MEE10 3 0 0 3
10 Finite Element Analysis
76
19MEE11 3 0 0 3
11 Design of Piping Systems
19MEE12 3 0 0 3
12 Product Design and Development
19MEE13 3 0 0 3
13 Automobile Engineering
19MEE14 Advanced Modeling and Computational 0 0 6 3
14
skill Laboratory*
MANUFACTURING
19MEE15 Process Planning and Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3

15
19MEE16 Smart Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
16
19MEE17 Welding and Casting Process 3 0 0 3
17
19MEE18 Light Weight and Industrial Composites 3 0 0 3
18
19MEE19 Computer Integrated Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
19
19MEE20 Industrial Robotics and Automation 3 0 0 3
20
19MEE21 Modern Machining Processes 3 0 0 3
21
19MEE22 Surface Engineering and corrosion 3 0 0 3
22
19MEE23 Industrial Tribology 3 0 0 3
23
19MEE24 3 0 0 3
24 Non Destructive Testing and Evaluation
19MEE25 3 0 0 3
25 Lean Manufacturing
19MEE26 3 0 0 3
26 Industrial Engineering and Management
19MEE27 3 0 0 3
27 Fundamentals of Nanoscience
THERMAL
19MEE28 Compressible Flow and its Fundamentals 3 0 0 3

28
19MEE29 3 0 0 3
29 Computational Fluid Dynamics
19MEE30 Power Plant Engineering 3 0 0 3
30
19MEE31 Refrigeration and Air conditioning 3 0 0 3
31
19MEE32 Turbo Machinery 3 0 0 3
32
77
19MEE33 Energy and Efficiency Management 3 0 0 3

33
19MEE34 Advanced Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
34
19MEE35 Rocket Engineering 3 0 0 3
35
19MEE36 Advanced IC Engines 3 0 0 3
36
19MEE37 Design of Heat Exchangers 3 0 0 3
37
19MEE38 Solar Engineering 3 0 0 3
38
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
19MEE39 Probability & Statistics 3 0 0 3

39
Soft Computing Techniques in Mechanical
19MEE40 3 0 0 3
40
Engineering
78
LIST OF OPEN ELECTIVE COURSES

No.
19MEP01 3 0 0 3
1 Industrial Safety
19MEP02 3 0 0 3
2 New and Renewable Sources of Energy
19MEP03 3 0 0 3
3 Professional Ethics for Engineers
19MEP04 3 0 0 3
4 Principles of Management
19MEP05 3 0 0 3
5 Supply Chain Management
19MEP06 3 0 0 3
6 Design of Experiments
79

ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY, KARAIKUDI-03
(A Government Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)
B.E. (PART TIME) - MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM and SYLLABUS
REGULATION-2019
80
Alagappa Chettiar Government College of Engineering & Technology, Karaikudi-3

(An Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University Chennai)
Regulations 2019
B.E.(PART TIME) MECHANICALENGINEERING
CURRICULUM
SEMESTER I
S.No. Subject Code Subject L T P C
Theory
1 19MAB12 Mathematics I 3 1 0 4
2 19PHB13 Physics :Properties of Materials and Mechanics 3 1 0 4
3 19CHB21 Chemistry 3 1 0 4
4 19EEG16 Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering 4 0 0 4
5 19MEC33 Manufacturing Technology-I 3 0 0 3
Total Credits = 19
SEMESTER II
Theory
1 19MAB22 3 1 0 4
Mathematics –II
2 19MEC31 Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
3 19MEB32 Engineering Materials and Metallurgy 3 0 0 3
4 19MEG31 Applied Mechanics 3 0 0 3
5 19MEC44 Manufacturing Technology-II 3 0 0 3
Total Credits = 16
81
SEMESTER III
Theory
1 19MEC32 3 0 0 3
Fluid Mechanics
2 19MEC41 Mechanics of Solids 3 0 0 3
3 19MEC43 Thermal Engineering 3 0 0 3
4 19MEH41 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3
5 19CHM32 Environmental Engineering 3 0 0 3
Total Credits = 15
SEMESTER IV
Theory
1 19MEC42 Theory of machines – I 3 0 0 3
2 19MEC51 Design of Machine Elements 3 0 0 3
3 19MEC53 Fluid Machinery 3 0 0 3
4 19MEC71 Engineering Metrology and Measurements 3 0 0 3
5 19MEXX Professional Elective - I 3 0 0 3
Total Credits = 15
82
SEMESTER V
Theory
1 19MEC52 Theory of machines – II 3 0 0 3
2 19MEH51 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3
3 19MEC61 Design of Mechanical Drives 3 0 0 3
4 19MEXX Professional Elective - II 3 0 0 3
Practical
5 19MEL51 Simulation and Analysis Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
SEMESTERVI
Theory
1 19MEC62 Heat and Mass Transfer 3 0 0 3
2 19MEC63 Mechatronics 3 0 0 3
3 19MEH61 Operation Research 3 0 0 3
4 19MEXX Professional Elective – III 3 0 0 3
Practical
5 19MEL61 Heat and Mass Transfer Laboratory 0 0 3 1.5
83
SEMESTERVII
Theory
1 19MEXX Professional Elective – IV 3 0 0 3
2 19MEXX Professional Elective – V 3 0 0 3
3 19MEXX Professional Elective – VI 3 0 0 3
4 19MEZ71 Project & Viva Voce 0 0 9 6
Total Credits = 15
Total Credits = 107
84
LIST OF PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE COURSES

No.
DESIGN
19MEE01 Computer Aided Design
1 3 0 0 3
19MEE02 Hydraulics and Pneumatics
2 3 0 0 3
19MEE03 Design of Pressure Vessels
3 3 0 0 3
19MEE04 Design of Production Tooling 3 0 0 3
4
19MEE05 Mechanical Vibrations 3 0 0 3
5
19MEE06 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS) 3 0 0 3
6
19MEE07 Plastics Engineering and Technology 3 0 0 3
7
19MEE08 Design of Electric Vehicles 3 0 0 3
8
19MEE09 3 0 0 3
9 Advanced Strength of Materials
19MEE10 Finite Element Analysis 3 0 0 3

10
19MEE11 Design of Piping Systems 3 0 0 3
11
19MEE12 Product Design and Development 3 0 0 3
12
19MEE13 Automobile Engineering 3 0 0 3
13
19MEE14 Advanced Modeling and Computational 0 0 6 3
14
skill Laboratory*
MANUFACTURING
19MEE15 Process Planning and Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3

15
19MEE16 Smart Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
16
19MEE17 Welding and Casting Process 3 0 0 3
17
19MEE18 Light Weight and Industrial Composites 3 0 0 3
18
19MEE19 Computer Integrated Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
19
19MEE20 Industrial Robotics and Automation 3 0 0 3
20
85
19MEE21 Modern Machining Processes 3 0 0 3

21
19MEE22 Surface Engineering and corrosion 3 0 0 3
22
19MEE23 Industrial Tribology 3 0 0 3
23
19MEE24 Non Destructive Testing and Evaluation 3 0 0 3
24
19MEE25 Lean Manufacturing 3 0 0 3
25
19MEE26 Industrial Engineering and Management 3 0 0 3
26
19MEE27 Fundamentals of Nanoscience 3 0 0 3
27
THERMAL
19MEE28 Compressible Flow and its Fundamentals 3 0 0 3

28
19MEE29 3 0 0 3
29 Computational Fluid Dynamics
19MEE30 Power Plant Engineering 3 0 0 3
30
19MEE31 Refrigeration and Air conditioning 3 0 0 3
31
19MEE32 Turbo Machinery 3 0 0 3
32
19MEE33 Energy and Efficiency Management 3 0 0 3
33
19MEE34 Advanced Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
34
19MEE35 Rocket Engineering 3 0 0 3
35
19MEE36 Advanced IC Engines 3 0 0 3
36
19MEE37 Design of Heat Exchangers 3 0 0 3
37
19MEE38 Solar Engineering 3 0 0 3
38
APPLIED MATHEMATICS
19MEE39 Probability & Statistics 3 0 0 3

39
Soft Computing Techniques in Mechanical
19MEE40 3 0 0 3
40
Engineering
86
87
SYLLABUS - 2019
FULL TIME & PART TIME
88
89
III SEMESTER
90
PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND NUMERICAL

19MEB32
METHODS
L T P C
3 1 0 4
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The Course objective is to develop the skills of the students in solving different kinds of problems that
occur in their engineering field. The Course aims at exposing the students to gain adequate knowledge in
partial differential equations & their applications and its solutions using Fourier series and solutions of
differential equations which occur in plenty of the engineering and technology problems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
CO1 : Solve partial differential equations involved in Wave phenomena, Heat conduction in homogenous
solids and potential theory.
CO2 : Apply Fourier series to solve various problems that arise in Electrical Engineering and Heat
conduction.
CO3 : Solve boundary value problems that arise from transverse vibrations of a string, heat flow in one
dimension and steady state temperature distribution in two dimensions.
CO4 : Apply numerical solution methods for most of the engineering problems that involve ordinary
differential equations with initial conditions.
CO5 : Solve boundary value problems in partial differential equations using iterative procedure.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT I: PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12 hrs
Formation of partial differential equations- Lagrange’s linear equation- Solutions of standard types of first
order partial differential equations- Solutions of homogenous linear partial differential equations of second
and higher order with constant coefficients.
UNIT II: FOURIER SERIES 12 hrs
General Fourier series- Dirichlet’s conditions- Odd and Even functions- Half Range sine series- Half Range
cosine series- Complex form of Fourier series- Parseval’s identity- Harmonic analysis.
91
UNIT III: APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12 hrs
Solutions of one-dimensional wave equation- one-dimensional equation of heat conduction- Steady state
solution of two-dimensional equation of heat conduction (insulated edges excluded)- Fourier series
solutions in Cartesian co-ordinates.
UNIT IV: INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL

12 hrs
EQUATIONS
Single step methods- Taylor series method- Euler’s method- Modified and Improved Euler’s methods for
solving first order equations - Runge-Kutta fourth order method for solving first and second order
equations- Multistep methods- Milne’s and Adam’s predictor and corrector methods.
UNIT V: BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL

12 hrs
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
Finite difference solution of second order ordinary differential equation- Finite difference solution of one-
dimensional heat equation by explicit and implicit methods- One-dimensional wave equation and Two-
dimensional Laplace and Poisson equations.
Total Hours : 60
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal.B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics “, 43rd Edition, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2015.
Veerarajan.T, “Engineering Mathematics (For Semester III)”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
2.
Pub.Co.Ltd, New Delhi, 2017.
Veerarajan.T and Ramachandran T, “Numerical Methods with Programming in C” Second Edition,
3. Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.Co.Ltd, 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.
2. Ramana.B.V. “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.Co.Ltd, New Delhi, 2010.
Grewal. B.S. and Grewal. J.S., “Numerical Methods in Engineering and Science ", 10th Edition,
3.
Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
Kandasamy.P, Thilagavathy.K & Gunavathy.K, “Numerical Methods”,3rd revised edition, S.Chand &
4.
Company Ltd., 2015.
92
MAPPING OF PROGRAMME OUTCOMES WITH COURSE OUTCOMES

Programme Outcomes / Programme Specific Outcomes
Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
Average Correlation
3 3 2 3 2 2 2
Level
93
19MEB32 ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND METALLURGY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about the structure, properties, heat treatment and applications of metals and non-
metallic materials, concepts of alloys so as to identify and select suitable materials for various
Engineering applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1 : Explain alloys, their types and phase diagrams, interpret the microstructure and properties of
steel using iron carbon equilibrium diagram
CO2 : Explain the effect of heat treatment of steel and the different types of heat treatment
CO3 : Summarize the properties and applications of Ferrous and non-ferrous metallic materials
CO4 : Summarize the properties and applications of non-metallic materials
CO5 : Explain the metallurgical aspects of welded materials and evaluation of mechanical properties
and weld quality
UNIT I: ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS 9 hrs
Constitution of alloys – Solid solutions, substitutional and interstitial – phase diagrams, Isomorphous,
eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic, and peritectoid reactions, Iron–carbon equilibrium diagram, classification
of steel and cast Iron - microstructure, properties and application
UNIT II: HEAT TREATMENT 9 hrs
Definition – Full annealing, stress relief, recrystallisation and spheroidising – normalising, hardening and
Tempering of steel, Isothermal transformation diagrams – cooling curves superimposed on TTT diagram
and CCR – Hardenability, Jominy end quench test – Austempering, martempering – case hardening,
carburizing, Nitriding, cyaniding, carbonitriding – Flame and Induction hardening – Vacuum and Plasma
hardening
UNIT III: FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METALS 9 hrs
Effect of alloying additions on steel- α and β stabilisers– stainless and tool steels – HSLA, Maraging
94
steels – Cast Iron – Grey, white, malleable, spheroidal – alloy cast irons, Copper and copper alloys –
Brass, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and Al-Cu – precipitation strengthening treatment –
Bearing alloys, Mg-alloys, Ni-based super alloys and Titanium alloys.
UNIT IV: NON-METALLIC MATERIALS 9 hrs
Polymers – types of polymer, commodity and engineering polymers – Properties and applications of
various thermosetting and thermoplastic polymers (PP, PS, PVC, PMMA, PET, PC, PA, ABS, PI, PAI,
PPO, PPS, PEEK, PTFE, Polymers – Urea and Phenol formaldehydes)-Composites-Classifications-
Metal Matrix and FRP – Applications of Composites.
UNIT V: WELDING METALLURGY AND TESTING OF MATERIALS 9 hrs
Weldability – heat distribution during welding and thermal effects on parent metals – HAZ – factors
affecting HAZ- hardening, cracking, distortion and residual stresses – stress relief treatment of welds –
Mechanical tests - tension, compression, impact, and hardness. Non Destructive Testing basic principles
and testing method for Radiographic testing, Ultrasonic testing, Magnetic Particle inspection and Liquid
penetrant inspection test Eddy current testing.
Total Hours : 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Avner, S.H., “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1997.
William D Callister, “Material Science and Engineering” Wiley India Pvt Ltd, Revised Indian
2.
Edition 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Kenneth G.Budinski and Michael K. Budinski, “Engineering Materials”, Prentice Hall of India
1.
Private Limited, 2010.
2. Raghavan.V, “Materials Science and Engineering”, 6th edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.2015.
U.C.Jindal, “Material Science and Metallurgy, “Engineering Materials and Metallurgy”, First
3.
Edition, Dorling Kindersley, 2012
Upadhyaya. G.S. and Anish Upadhyaya, “Materials Science and Engineering”, Viva Books Pvt.
4.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.
95

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2
Average Correlation
3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2
Level
96
19MEG31 APPLIED MECHANICS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To design and analyse a mechanical system, the student should be aware and well versed of fundamental
principles of mechanics. Hence this course is aimed at imparting the fundamental principles of the
mechanics and application of mathematical tools like vector algebra, matrices, differential and integral
calculus for analysing the object under the action of forces.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Apply the fundamental principles to determine the state of equilibrium of an object under the
action of forces
CO2 : Outline the importance of cross sectional properties

CO3 : Understand the law of friction and implement the concept to solve various applications
CO4 : Explain the types of motion and their analysis.
CO5 : Apply the principles of work and energy, impulse and momentum to analyze objects in motion
COURSE CONTENT
Review of fundamentals of mechanics –– system of forces – laws of mechanics -

parallelogram, triangle and polygon law of forces – resultant of a force system – resolution 3 Hrs
and composition of forces
UNIT I: EQUILIBRIUM OF OBJECTS IN 2-D AND 3-D 8 Hrs
Equilibrium of a particle in 2D space -Lami’s theorem – Free body diagram– trusses and frames –
member forces – equilibrium of a particle in 3D space - moment of a force – physical significance of
moment - Varignon’s theorem – analysis of rigid bodies in 2D and 3D - supports and reactions.
UNIT II: CENTROID, CENTRE OF GRAVITY AND MOMENT OF INERTIA 8 Hrs

Introduction – concept of first moment – definition of centroid – centroid of an area – centroid of lamina
with simple , complex geometry and frames–-moment of inertia – Parallel axis theorem –
97
perpendicular axis theorem-polar moment of inertia - radius of gyration- moment of inertia of plane
areas-principal moment of inertia-principle planes.
UNIT III: FRICTION 8 Hrs

Review of fundamental concepts of friction – Role of friction in engineering applications and its
analysis – ladder– belt - rope – wedge – screws – efficiency – mechanical advantage - rolling resistance.
UNIT IV: BASICS OF DYNAMICS 9 Hrs

Definition – kinematics and kinetics – displacements, velocity and acceleration- Equations of motion -
Types of motion – Rectilinear motion of a particle with uniform velocity, uniform acceleration, varying
acceleration – motion curves – motion under gravity – relative motion – curvilinear motion of a particle
– projectiles – angle of projection – range – time of flight and maximum height. Newton’s second law of
motion – linear momentum – D’Alembert’s principle, Dynamic equilibrium –– work and energy
equation of particles.
UNIT V: IMPULSE MOMENTUM AND IMPACT OF ELASTIC BODIES 9 Hrs
Impulsive force – Impulse – momentum – Equations of momentum – principle impulse and momentum
– impulsive motion – conservation of momentum. Definition – Time of compression, restitution,
collision – law of conservation of momentum – Co-efficient of restitution –types of impact – collision of
elastic bodies by direct central impact and oblique impact – collision of small body with a massive body
– loss of kinetic energy.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
S.S. Bhavikatti and K.G. Rajasekarappa, “Engineering Mechanics”, New Age International (P)
1.
Ltd.1994
2. S.C. Natesan, “Engineering Mechanics”, Umesh Publications, 2018.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. F.B. Beer and E.R. Johnston, “Mechanics for Engineers”, Tata Mc.Graw Hill publishing Ltd
2. S. Timoshenko and Young DH, “Engineering Mechanics”, 5th edition, Mc.Graw Hill, 2013.
3. Irvingh shames, “Engineering Mechanics”, 4th edition, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, Delhi.
Domkundwar V.M, “Engineering Mechanics (Statics and Dynamics)”, Dhanpat Rai& Co. Ltd.
4.
2006
98

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
Average Correlation
3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
Level
99
19MEC31 THERMODYNAMICS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To impart knowledge on the basics and application of first law of thermodynamics.
2. To impart knowledge on the second law of thermodynamics and entropy.
3. To teach students about properties of pure substances and to analyze vapour power cycles.
To help the students understand various gas laws and equations of state and apply them to solve
4.
problems of gas mixtures in estimating enthalpy, entropy, specific heat and internal energy.
5. To know about the properties of moist air used in air-conditioning design.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to
CO1 : Apply the zeroth law and first law of thermodynamics by formulating temperature scales and
calculating the property changes in closed and open engineering systems.
CO2 : Apply the concept of second law of thermodynamics in analyzing the performance of various
thermal devices through energy and entropy calculations
CO3 : Apply the concepts of pure substance in analyzing the performance of vapour power cycles
CO4 : Solve the variation of properties of gas mixtures and thermodynamic relations
CO5 : Solve psychrometry problems applicable for air conditioning
COURSE CONTENT:
(Use of standard thermodynamic tables, Mollier diagram and Psychometric chart are permitted)
UNIT I: BASIC CONCEPT AND FIRST LAW 9 Hrs
Basic concepts - concept of continuum, macroscopic approach, thermodynamic systems - closed,
open and isolated. Property, state, path and process, quasi-static process, work, modes of work, Zeroth law
of thermodynamics – concept of temperature and heat. Concept of ideal and real gases. First law of
thermodynamics – application to closed and open systems, internal energy, specific heat capacities,
enthalpy, steady flow process with reference to various thermal equipment’s.
UNIT II: SECOND LAW AND ENTROPY 9 Hrs
100
Second law of thermodynamics – Kelvin’s and Clausius statements of second law - Reversibility and
irreversibility. Carnot theorem, Carnot cycle, reversed Carnot cycle, efficiency, COP - Thermodynamic
temperature scale, Clausius inequality, concept of entropy, entropy of ideal gas, principle of increase of
entropy - Expressions for availability and irreversibility (Discussion only)
UNIT III: PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCE AND STEAM POWER CYCLE 9 Hrs
Properties of pure substances – Thermodynamic properties of pure substances in solid, liquid and vapour
phases, phase rule, P-V, P-T, T-V, T-S, H-S diagrams, PVT surfaces, thermodynamic properties of
steam. Calculations of work done and heat transfer in non-flow and flow processes - Standard Rankine
cycle, Reheat and regenerative cycle
UNIT IV: THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS AND IDEAL GAS MIXTURES 9 Hrs

Maxwell’s equations - general relations for du, dh, ds, Cp and Cv - Joule Thomson coefficient, Clausius
Clapeyron equation, Phase Change Processes - simple calculations - Properties of Ideal gas. Ideal and real
gas comparison - Equations of state for ideal and real gas, Gas mixtures - Dalton’s law of partial pressures -
P-V-T behavior of gas mixtures - Property calculations.
UNIT V: PSYCHROMETRY 9 Hrs

Psychrometry and psychrometric charts, property calculations of air-vapour mixtures, Psychrometric
process – Sensible heat exchange processes, Latent heat exchange processes - Adiabatic mixing,
evaporative cooling, problems.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Nag.P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 5th edition Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
Lynn D Russell, George A, Adebiyi “Engineering Thermodynamics” Indian Edition, Oxford
2.
University Press, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Er.R.K.Rajput, “Thermal Engineering” 6th Edition, Laxmi Publications.
101
REFERENCES:
Yunus A Cengel and Michael A Boles, “Thermodynamics An Engineering Approach”, Tata McGraw
1.
Hill, 2019
nd
E.RathaKrishnan, “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”, 2 Edition, Prentice Hall of
2.
India Pvt. Ltd, 2006.
3. Arora C.P, “Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
Merala C, Pother, Craig W, Somerton, “Thermodynamics for Engineers”, 3 r d Schaum outline
4.
series, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Ven wylen and Sontag, “Classical Thermodynamics”, Wiley Eastern, 1987
6. Holman.J.P., “Thermodynamics”, 3rd Ed. McGraw-Hill, 1995.

Mapping PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
Average Correlation
3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
Level
102
19MEC32 FLUID MECHANICS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1 To introduce and explain basic fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics, which is used in the applications of
Aerodynamics, Hydraulics and Marine Engineering, etc.
2 To learn fluid properties and hydrostatic law.
3 To understand the importance of flow measurement and its applications in Industries and to obtain the
loss of flow in a flow system.
4 To understand the basic concept of boundary layers and advancement of practical hydraulics.
5 To understand dimensional analysis and their applications in model testing
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the basic concept of fluid flow and behavior of fluid at rest
CO2: Derive the pathlines and streamlines in Cartesian form from a velocity field
CO3: Explain the different instruments for measuring pressure and discharge
CO4: Analyse the flow through conduits for energy transfer and losses
CO5: Apply dimensional analysis to establish relationship between fluid flow parameters
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT I: BASIC CONCEPTS 9 hrs

Concept of fluid - Dimensions and Units - Thermodynamic properties of Fluids: Pressure, Density, Specific
Gravity, Viscosity, Surface Tension, Capillarity, Compressibility and Bulk Modulus - Fluid Statics:
Pressure at a Point, Pascal’s Law – Buoyancy forces - Stability of floating bodies - Hydrostatic law and
aerostatic law – Manometry.
UNIT II: FLUID KINEMATICS 9 hrs

Lagrangian and Eulerian Descriptions – Velocity and Acceleration of a fluid particle - Stream line, stream
103
tubes and path line - Continuity Equation in Cartesian Coordinates – Vorticity and irrotationality - Velocity
Potential and Stream Function.
UNIT III: FLUID DYNAMICS 9 hrs

Different types of fluid forces - Non-dimensional numbers - Euler’s equation for motion - Bernoulli’s
equation - Applications of Bernoulli’s Equation, Venturimeter and Orifice meter – Momentum equation -
Navier Stokes Equation
UNIT IV: FLOW THROUGH CIRCULAR CONDUITS 9 hrs

Introduction to Viscous Flow - Flow through circular pipes - Boundary layer concepts – types of boundary
layer thickness – Loss of Head due to friction in viscous flow -Darcy Weisbach equation – friction factor -
Moody diagram - Turbulent flow – Velocity distribution in smooth pipes - Flow through pipes - Energy
Loses – Major & Minor Loses of Pipes, Flow through Pipes in series and parallel - Power Transmission
through pipes.
UNIT V: DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS AND MODEL TESTING 9 hrs
Buckingham’s theorem, Rayleigh’s Indicial Method - Reynolds, Froude, Euler, Mach number and their
applications in model testing.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Bansal, R.K., “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics Machines”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi,
1.
2005
Kumar. K.L., “Engineering Fluid Mechanics” Eurasia Publishing House (P) Ltd., 7th edition New
2.
Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Ramamritham. S, “Fluid Mechanics, Hydraulics and Fluid Machines”, 9th edition, DhanpatRai& Sons,
1.
Delhi, 2014.
2. Rathakrishnan. E, “Fluid Mechanics”, Prentice Hall of India (II Ed.), 2007.
3. Streeter. V. L., and Wylie, E.B., “Fluid Mechanics”, McGraw Hill, 2017.
Tannehill, J.E., Anderson, D.A., and Pletcher, R.H.,”Computational Fluid Mechanics and Heat
4.
Transfer”, 2nd ed., Taylor & Francis, 2012.
Hoffmann, K.A. and Chiang, S.T., “Computational Fluid Dynamics for Engineers”, Engineering
5.
Education Systems, 2000.
104

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
Average
3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2
Correlation Level
105
19MEC33 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY-I

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce various forming processes available in manufacturing products.
2. To impart knowledge on various fabrication techniques used in industries.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Select suitable metal casting and joining processes.
CO2 : Compare and select different metal forming processes.
CO3 : Select sheet metal and powder metallurgy processes for suitable applications.
CO4 : Analyze the load estimation for bulk metal forming and sheet metal forming processes
CO5 : Compare and choose various processes available in manufacturing of plastic components.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT I: METAL CASTING PROCESSES 9

Moulding sands - Types and Properties, Patterns - types of patterns, selection of materials for
patterns - pattern allowances, core making processes, Different types of castings, Design of patterns,
moulds and cores, Solidification and cooling, riser and gating design, moulding machines, Melting
furnaces Casting defects and remedies
UNIT II METAL FABRICATION PROCESSES 9

Classification of welding processes: Principle of Gas welding, Arc welding, resistance welding,
Solid State Welding, Thermo chemical welding and radiant energy welding – Welding defect and
remedies-Brazing and soldering and adhesive bonding.
UNIT III METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9
106
Introduction to Forging, rolling, extrusion and drawing processes, Plastic deformation and yield
criteria. Fundamentals of hot and cold working processes. Load estimation for bulk metal forming
processes like forging, rolling, extrusion and Drawing.
UNIT IV SHEET METAL AND POWDER METALLURGY PROCESSES 9

Sheet metal forming methods: Shearing, Blanking, Bending, Stretch Forming, high velocity and deep
forming. Load estimation for Sheet forming Processes like shearing, deep drawing, bending.
Principles of Powder Metallurgy: Methods of producing powder. Pressing, sintering, sizing -
Advantages and limitations.
UNIT V: PLASTICS MANUFACTURING PROCESSES 9

Plastics Working: Types of plastics - plastic moulding processes- Injection moulding - Compression
Moulding – Transfer Moulding – Extrusion – Blow moulding – Thermoforming - Rotational
Moulding.
Total Hours: 45
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Serope Kalpakjian, Steven R Schmid , “Manufacturing Engineering & Technology”, Pearson,
7th Edition, 2018.
2. M.P.Groover, “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing Materials, Processes and Systems”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
3. P N Rao, “Manufacturing Technology Volume 1: Foundry, Forming and Welding”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 4th Edition, 2017.
4. Helmi A. Youssef, Hassan A. El-Hofy, Mahmoud H. Ahmed, “Manufacturing Technology:
Materials, Processes, and Equipment”, CRC Press, 2011.
5 Nee, Andrew Yeh Ching (Ed), “Handbook of Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”,
Springer, 2015.
107

CO1 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 1 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 3 2 2
Average
3 2 2 2 1 3 2 2
Correlation Level
108
19MEL31 MACHINE DRAWING PRACTICE

L T P C
0 0 4 2
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge to the students to read, understand and develop technical drawings following the
codes and standards
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Read and develop technical drawing as per standards
CO2: Apply the knowledge of fits and tolerances for various applications.
CO3: Utilize drafting and modeling packages for creating technical drawings
CO4: Prepare working drawings with dimensions and bill of material
CO5: Create assembly drawing of machine components from part drawings by manual drafting and
computer aided modeling
COURSE CONTENT:
(Use of Code and Data book is permitted)
Conversion of Pictorial to orthographic projections of simple components (to review
4 Hrs
basics of orthographic projection)
UNIT I: DRAWING STANDARDS & FITS AND TOLERANCES 9 Hrs
Code of practice for Engineering Drawing, BIS specifications – Welding symbols, riveted joints, keys,
fasteners – Reference to hand book for the selection of standard components like bolts, nuts, screws,
keys etc., Limits, Fits – Tolerance of individual dimensions – Specification of Fits, basic principles of
geometric dimensioning & tolerance
UNIT II: ASSEMBLY DRAWING 21 Hrs

Preparation of assembled views of Couplings – Flange, Universal, Oldham’s, Muff, Gear couplings.
Joints – Knuckle, Gib & cotter, strap, sleeve & cotter joints. Preparation of Bill of materials and
tolerance data sheet, Assembly drawings of components like screw jack, Plummer block, tail stock and
safety valve from part drawings
109
UNIT III: INTRODUCTION TO 2D DRAFTING 9 Hrs

Basic commands of drafting package – Creating 2D drawing using simple entities like line, arc, circle,
ellipse, polygon etc.,. Editing, Dimensioning, Layering, Hatching, Block, Array
Creating 3-D models of components by extrusion and Boolean operations using primitives, Drafting
models of machine components like bolts, screw fasteners, bearings, couplings and joints
UNIT IV: 3D GEOMETRIC MODELING AND ASSEMBLY 21 Hrs

Sketcher - Datum planes – Protrusion – Holes - Part modeling – Extrusion – Revolve – Sweep – Loft –
Blend – Fillet - Pattern – Chamfer - Round - Mirror – Section – Assembly Engine parts – Piston,
connecting rod, cross-head (vertical and horizontal), stuffing box, multi-plate clutch. Miscellaneous
machine components – Screw jack, machine vice, tail stock, chuck, vane pump and gear pump.
Total Hours: 64
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N. D. Bhatt and V.M. Panchal, “Machine Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House,2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. N. D. Bhatt and V.M. Panchal, “Machine Drawing”, 48th Edition, Charotar house pvt lmd., 2013.
2. Junnarkar, N.D., “Machine Drawing”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
N. Sidheshwar, P. Kanaiah, V.V.S. Sastri, ”Machine Drawing” ,1st edition, published by Tata Mc
3.
GrawHill,2017.
S. Trymbaka Murthy, “A Text Book of Computer Aided Machine Drawing”, CBS Publishers,
4.
New Delhi, 2008
5. Ajeet Dr Singh, “Machine Drawing Includes AutoCAD”, Tata McGraw-hill,2012
110

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 1 3 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 1
Average Correlation
3 3 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 1
Level
111
19MEL32 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To understand the procedure making of green sand mould.
2. Practice to make simple welding operations using Arc and TIG welding machines
3. To impart machining skill on lathe by practicing turning, thread cutting, drilling, boring operations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Produce simple components by machining using lathe.
CO2: Join similar and dissimilar components using welding
CO3: Prepare moulds for casting of mechanical components.
COURSE CONTENT:
LATHE
1.1 Facing, plain turning and step turning
1.2. Taper turning using compound rest, Tailstock set over, etc
1.3. Single and Multi-start V thread, cutting and knurling
1.4. Boring and internal thread cutting.
WELDING EXCERCISES
2.1. Horizontal, Vertical and Overhead welding.
2.2. Gas Cutting, Gas Welding.
2.3. Brazing
2.4 Welding parts using TIG and MIG welding
PREPARATION OF SAND MOULD
3.1. Mould with solid, split patterns
3.2. Mould with loose-piece pattern
3.3. Mould with core
Total Hours: 45
112

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 2
Outcomes
Course
CO2 3 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 2
Average
Correlation 3 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 2 2
Level
113
19MEM31 YOGA FOR HUMAN EXCELLENCE Non Credit Course
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To train our Students in Yoga Practices
2. To inculcate moral and ethical values to students
3. To imbibe our culture and tradition among young minds.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Understand the purpose of Life and activate the various parts of body to make humans
healthy and happy.
CO2 : Develop the health of human body by relaxation techniques
CO3 : Make senses Sharp with good decision making and postpone the deaths by maintain youth
CO4 : Attain Perspicacity, Magnanimity, Receptivity, Adaptability, and Creativity
CO5 : Attract the cosmic energy compliant with our mental Frequencies.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT I: PHYSICAL STRUCTURE AND ITS FUNCTIONS

1. Yoga - Purpose of life, philosophy of life
2. Physical structure- 3 forms of body - pain, disease, death - causes for disease
3. Method and limit in 5 deeds
4. Importance of physical exercise
4.1. Rules and regulation of simplified physical exercises
4.2. Hand exercise, leg exercise, breathing exercise
4.3. Eye exercise, kapalapathi - benefits
4.4. Maharasana, body massage, acu-pressure, body relaxation – Benefits.
UNIT II: YOGASANAS
Rules& Regulations– asanas, pranayama, mudra, bandha.
114
UNIT III: GREATNESS OF LIFE FORCE

1. Philosophy of kayakalpa - physical body – sexual vital fluid - life force bio Magnetism, Mind -
Kayakalpa practical.
2. Sex and spirituality - value of sexual vital fluid, married life-chastity- Jeeva Samadhi
3. Intensifying bio magnetism through exercise - lamp gazing-rules-benefits
4. Mirror gazing-rules-benefits, passes for healing.
UNIT IV:MIND
1. Bio-magnetism & mind-imprinting &magnifying -eight essential factors of Living beings
2. Mental Frequency -functions-ten stages of mind
3. Benefits of meditation-Lowering the mental frequencies (Perspicacity,
Magnanimity, Receptivity, Adaptability, Creativity)
4. Simplified Kundalini yoga-Agna, Santhi, Thuriam, Thuriyatheetha
UNIT V: SPECIAL MEDITATION
1. Panchendria medidation –Nithyananda meditation
2. Pancha bhootha navagraha meditation
3. Nine centre meditatoin
4. Divine meditation
TEXT BOOKS:
1. YOGIC LIFE (Body, Life-force, Mind) - Vethathiri Publications
REFERENCES
1. Yoga for Modern Age – Vethathiri Maharashi
2. Mind – Vethathiri Maharashi
3. Karma Yoga – Vethathiri Maharashi
115

Mapping
CO1 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
CO5 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
Average Correlation
2 2 3 2 2 3 3
Level
116
117
IV SEMESTER
118
19MEC41 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the nature of stresses developed in simple geometries such as bars, beams, shafts,
cylinders and spheres for various types of simple loads. Elastic deformation occurring in various simple
geometries for different types of loading.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Explain the nature of stresses developed in simple geometries such as bars, cantilevers,
beams, shafts, cylinders and spheres for various types of simple loads.
CO2 : Analyze the beams with different support and loading conditions.
CO3 : Evaluate the deflection of beams and column for its stability
CO4 : Analyze the shear stress distribution in solid and hollow circular section due to torsion
CO5 : Analyze biaxial state of stress.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT I: STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 9 hrs

Rigid and Deformable bodies – Strength, Stiffness and Stability – Stresses and Strains: Tensile,
Compressive and Shear – Material Behaviour- Elastic Vs Plastic – Response of Real Materials: Tensile
Test, Compressive Test, Shear Test, Cyclic Tests - strain gauges and rosettes – Deformation of
Statically determinate and Inderterminate bars of variable cross-section& Composite section under axial
load – Thermal stress – Elastic constants – Plane Strain – Volumetric Strain.
UNIT II: ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF PRISMATIC BEAMS 9 hrs

Introduction – Shear and Bending-Moment Diagrams – Cantilever, Simply Supported and Overhanging
beams – Relations among Load, Shear, and Bending Moment – Stresses in Beams – Theroy of pure
bending - Relative Efficiency of Various Beam Shapes – Beams with composite cross section– Shearing
Stresses in Beams of Rectangular, Circular Section and Webs of beams with Flanges.
119
UNIT III: DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9 hrs

Introduction – Slope, Deflection and Radius of Curvature – Methods of Determination of Slope and
Deflection – Double Integration Method – Mecaulay’s Method – Moment Area Method –Method of
Superposition– Stability of Columns – Buckling – Critical load – End Conditions – Equivalent Length
of a column – Euler equation – Slenderness ratio – Rankine formula for columns.
UNIT IV: TORSION 9 hrs

Theory of torsion of solid & hollow circular bars – Shear Stress distribution – Torsion Formula –
Nonuniform Torsion – Transmission of Power by circular shafts – Statically Indeterminate Torsional
Members– Closed and Open Coiled helical springs – springs in series and parallel – Design of helical
coil springs.
UNIT V: ANALYSIS OF STRESSES IN TWO DIMENSIONS 9 hrs

Internal Stress – Cauchy’s Concept of Stress – Saint-Venant’s Principle – State of Stresses (Plane
Stress) – Equilibrium of Stress – Stress Transformation – Principal Planes and Stresses – Mohr’s circle
– Maximum Shear Stress – Application of Plane Stress (Pressure Vessel)- Stresses and Deformation in
thin cylindrical and Spherical Shells - Strain energy – Strain energy in uniaxial, bending and torsion
loads.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Popov, E.P., “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
2. Beer P. and ER Johnston, “Mechanics of Materials”, 7th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Co,2014.
3. Rajput.R.K., “Strength of Materials” 6th Ed S.Chand& co Ltd. New Delhi 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Nash, W.A., “Theory and Problems in Strength of Materials”, 6th Edition, Schaum Outline Series,
1.
McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2013.
2. Kazimi, S.M.A., “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., 2017.
3. Timoshenko, S.P., “Elements of Strength of Materials”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003.
120

Mapping Programme Outcomes / Programme Specific Outcomes
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
Average Correlation
3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
Level
121
19MEC42 THEORY OF MACHINES-I

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about basic types of mechanisms, joints and degrees of freedom to perform
position, velocity and acceleration analysis using graphical and analytical methods, synthesis of simple
mechanisms kinematic analysis of cam-follower motion and gear train configurations
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Describe mechanisms of specific paths through proper linkages by inversions of basic
kinematic chains.
CO2 : Analyze the motion of simple mechanisms.
CO3 : Synthesis simple mechanisms for function, path generation and body guidance
CO4 : Design a layout of cam for specified motion
CO5 : Develop gear trains for various applications.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT I: BASICS OF MECHANISMS 9 hrs

Introduction to mechanisms and its terminologies - Degree of freedom – Mobility - Kutzbach criterion -
Grubler’s criterion for planar mechanisms - Grashoff’s law - Kinematic Inversions of 4-bar chain -
Single slider and double slider crank chains – Quick return mechanism - Limiting positions -
Mechanical advantage - Transmission angle - Ratchets and escapements – Indexing Mechanisms –
Rocking Mechanisms – Straight line generators.
UNIT II: KINEMATIC ANALYSIS OF SIMPLE MECHANISMS 9 hrs

Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis in simple mechanisms having turning, sliding and
rolling pair - Coriolis acceleration using graphical relative motion method - Instantaneous center method
- Four bar and slider crank mechanisms.
122
UNIT III: SYNTHESIS OF SIMPLE MECHANISMS 9 hrs

Classification of kinematic synthesis problems - Two position synthesis of slider crank and crank rocker
mechanisms - Three position synthesis of double rocker mechanism -Chebychev spacing - Freudenstein
analytical method - synthesis of function generator using three precision positions, Graphical and
analytical design of a four bar linkage for body guidance and path generation by graphical method.
UNIT IV: CAMS AND FOLLOWERS 9 hrs

Types of cams and followers - Definitions - Derivatives of follower motion – High speed cams –
Undercutting – motions of the follower-Layout of cam profiles-Cams with specified contours
UNIT V: GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9 hrs

.Spur gear terminology and definitions - Law of toothed and involute gearing - Interference and
undercutting - Basics of involute , cycloidal, and nonstandard tooth profile - Terminologies of Helical,
Bevel, Worm, Rack and pinion gears.
Gear trains – Speed ratio, train value – Parallel axis gear trains – Epicyclic Gear Trains – Sun and Planet
Gear – bevel Epicyclic gear –Compound Epicyclic gear -Differentials – Automobile gear box.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.S. Rattan, “Theory of Machines”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill,2017.
J. J Uicker (Jr), G. R Pennock and J. E Shigley, “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, 5th
2.
Edition, Oxford International Student Edition, 2014.
J. S. Rao, R. V. Dukkipat “Mechanism and Machine Theory”2nd Ed., New Age International,
3.
2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ambekar A.G, “Mechanism and Machine Theory” Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
Hamilton H Mabie and Charles, “Mechanisms and Dynamics of Machinery” F Reinholtz, John-
2.
Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York, 1987.
Ghosh A. and Mallick A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines”, AffiliatedEast-West Press
3.
Pvt. Ltd., New Delh 2008.
Kenneth J Waldron and Gary L Kinzel, “Kinematics, Dynamics, and Design of Machinery”, John-
4.
Wiley and Sons Inc., New York. 2004.
123

Mapping Programme Outcomes / Programme Specific Outcomes
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
Average Correlation
3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1
Level
124
19MEC43 THERMAL ENGINEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire the knowledge about the air compressors, IC engines, boilers, refrigeration and air
conditioning system
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Evaluate the performance of air standard cycles
CO2 : Analyze the Performance of IC Engines.
CO3 : Analyze the working of Air compressors
CO4 : Illustrate the working of steam generators and its performances.
CO5 : Analyze the performance of Refrigeration and Air-conditioning systems
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT I: GAS POWER CYCLES 9 hrs

. Air standard cycles - Carnot cycle, Otto cycle, Diesel cycle, Stirling cycle, Ericsson cycle, Limited
pressure cycle – Calculation of Mean Effective Pressure and Air Standard Efficiency - Comparison of
Otto, Diesel, Dual and Brayton cycle. Aircraft Propulsion - Combined Brayton and Rankine cycle
UNIT II: IC ENGINES SYSTEMS AND PERFORMANCE 9 hrs

IC engine – Classification, working, components and their functions - Valve and port timing diagrams, p-v
diagrams- two stroke & four stroke, and SI & CI engines – comparison - Lubrication and Cooling systems
- Performance parameters and calculations- Morse and Heat Balance tests - Multipoint Fuel Injection
system and Common Rail Direct lnjection systems. Ignition systems –. Concepts of Supercharging and
Turbocharging – Emission Norms.
UNIT III: AIRCOMPRESSOR 9 hrs

Classification and working principle, work of compression with and without clearance.
125
Volumetric efficiency, Isothermal efficiency and isentropic efficiency of reciprocating air

compressors. Multistage air compressor and inter cooling – working of multistage air
compressor. Problems in single and two stage air compressors. Rotary compressors – Types-
working principles.
UNIT IV: BOILERS AND ITS PERFORMANCE 9 hrs

Steam Generators – Classification of Boilers, Selection of a Boiler, Boiler Terms, Fire Tube Boilers –
Simple Vertical Boiler, Cochran Boiler, Cornish Boiler, Lancashire Boiler, Locomotive Boiler, Scotch
Boiler. Water Tube Boilers – Babcock and Wilcox, Stirling Boiler. Boiler Mountings and Accessories -
Performance calculations.
UNIT V: REFRIGERATION AND AIRCONDITIONING 9 hrs

Vapour compression refrigeration cycle, Effect of Superheat and Sub-cooling, Performance calculations, ,
vapour absorption system, and thermoelectric refrigeration. Psychrometry – Fundamentals, Air
conditioning systems, concept of RSHF, GSHF and ESHF, Cooling load calculations. Cooling towers –
concept and types.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Ganesan .V. ,”Internal Combustion Engine”, Tata TataMcGrawHill Publishers Co. Ltd., New
1.
Delhi,2017.
th
2. Rudramoorthy, R., “Thermal Engineering”, 4 Edition, Tata McGrawHill, NewDelhi,2017.
th
3. Rajput, R.K., “Thermal Engineering”, 6 Edition, Laxmi Publications,2018.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ballaney, P.L., “ThermalEngineering”,KhannaPublishers,24thEdition, 2003

Domkundwar, Kothandaraman and Domkundwar, “A Course In Thermal Engineering”, Dhanpat
2.
Raj&Sons, 5th edition, 2016.
3. Colin R.Ferguson, “Internal Combustion Engines”, Johnwiley and Sons, NewYork, 2015.
4. Arora. C.P., “Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, Tata McGrawHill, NewDelhi,2017.
126

CO1 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 2 1 3
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
CO5 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 2 1 3
Average Correlation
3 3 3 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
Level
127
19MEC44 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY- II

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To help students acquire knowledge about the theory of metal cutting, mechanism of machining
1.
and the parameters that influence the machining processes.
To know about the various machining operations involved using different machine tools such as
2.
Lathe, drilling, milling, grinding etc.
To teach students different gear generation methods and principles of nontraditional machining
3.
processes.
To explain the students about fundamentals of CNC machines, machining center and prepare the
4.
students to write part programme using M and G codes.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Explain the mechanism of metal cutting and its associated performance parameters like tool
wear, tool life and surface finish
CO2 : Describe the constructional features and operations of different types of lathe.
CO3 : Summarize the constructional features and working of reciprocating machines, Milling and
gear cutting machines.
CO4 : Distinguish the different types of finishing processes like grinding, broaching and buffing
CO5 : Develop part program for CNC machines.
UNIT I: THEORY OF METAL CUTTING 9 hrs
Introduction to machining processes, classification, Mechanics of chip formation, single point cutting
tool, forces in machining, nomenclature. Orthogonal metal cutting,thermal aspects of chip formation,
cutting tool materials, tool wear, tool life, surface finish, cutting fluids and Machinability. Economics of
machining.
UNIT II: CENTRE LATHE AND SPECIAL PURPOSE LATHES 9 hrs

Centre lathe, constructional features, and specification, cutting tools, nomenclature various operations –
taper turning methods, thread cutting methods, special attachments, machining time and power
128
estimation. Capstan and turret lathes – tool layout, - automatic lathes: semi-automatics – single spindle:
swiss type, automatic screw type- multi spindle.
UNIT III: RECIPROCATING MACHINES, MILLING MACHINES AND GEAR

9 hrs
CUTTING
Reciprocating machine tools: shaper, planer, slotter, Milling operations: types of milling cutter, indexing,
machining time calculation. Hole making: drilling, reaming, boring, tapping, machining time
calculations – Gear cutting: gear milling, hobbing and gear shaping processes - Gear finishing.
UNIT IV: ABRASIVE PROCESS AND BROACHING 9 hrs

Abrasive processes: grinding wheel – specifications and selection, types of grinding process– cylindrical
grinding, surface grinding, center less grinding, and internal grinding- honing, lapping, super finishing,
polishing and buffing, abrasive jet machining - broaching machines: broach construction – push, pull,
surface and continuous broaching machines.
UNIT V: CNC MACHINE TOOLS AND PART PROGRAMMING 9 hrs

Numerical control (NC) machine tools – CNC types, constructional details, special features. Machining
centre, turning centre - part programming fundamentals – manual programming – micromachining –
wafer machining.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Roy. A. Lindberg, ―”Process and Materials of Manufacture II”, PHI / Pearson Education 4th
1.
Edition 2006.
Rao. P.N “Manufacturing Technology II, Metal Cutting and Machine Tools”, Tata McGraw– Hill,
2.
New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
Richerd R Kibbe, John E. Neely, Roland O. Merges and Warren J. White. Machine tool Practices‖,
1.
Prentice Hall of India, 1998
2. HMT – “Hindustan machine tools” Production Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
3. Hajra Choudhury. Elements of Workshop Technology – Vol.II. Media publishers, 2010.
Geoffrey Boothroyd, “Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools”, 3rd edition,
4.
McGraw Hill, 2005.
129

Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 1
Average Correlation
3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
Level
130
19MEH41 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To Acquire knowledge about TQM Principles & Tools
2. To Understand statistical tools for process improvement
3. To Know about requirement of various quality systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Describe quality concepts and philosophies of TQM.
CO2 : Apply TQM principles and concepts for continuous improvement
CO3 : Apply the quality tools and statistical fundamentals to enhance the quality
CO4 : Illustrate the TQM tools as a means to improve quality
CO5 : Explain the international standards to maintain quality in design, production and environmental
aspects
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION 8 hrs
Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of
manufacturing and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - Definition of TQM – TQM Framework -
Contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby – Barriers to TQM.
UNIT II: TQM PRINCIPLES 10 hrs

Leadership – Strategic quality planning, Quality statements - Customer focus –Customer orientation,
Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention -Employee involvement – Motivation,
Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal - Continuous
process improvement – PDSA cycle,5S, Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection,
Supplier Rating. Performance measures.
UNIT III: STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL (SPC) 10 hrs

The seven tools of quality – Statistical fundamentals – Measures of central tendency and dispersion –
Population and sample – Normal curve – Control charts for variables and attributes – Process capability –
131
Concept of six sigma – New seven management tools..
UNIT IV: TQM TOOLS 9 hrs

Benchmarking – Reasons to benchmark – Benchmarking process – Quality Function Deployment (QFD)
– House of quality – QFD process – Benefits – Taguchi quality loss function – Total Productive
Maintenance (TPM) – Concept – Improvement needs – FMEA – Stages of FMEA.
UNIT V: QUALITY SYSTEMS 8 hrs

Need for ISO 9000- ISO 9000-2000 Quality System – Elements, Documentation, Quality auditing- QS
9000 – ISO 14000 – Concepts, Requirements and Benefits – Case studies of TQM implementation in
manufacturing and service sectors including IT.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
Dale H.Besterfield, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia,4th Edition, Indian
1.
Reprint, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, “The Management and Control of Quality”,6th Edition,
1.
South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2010.
2. Oakland, J.S.”TQM” – Text with Cases‖, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, 3rd Edition, 2014.
3. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd.,2006..
4. Janakiraman,B and Gopal, R.K, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2015.

Mapping
CO1 1 2 1 3 1 1 2 2 1 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 1 2 1 3 1 1 2 2 1 3
CO3 1 3 1 3 1 1 2 2 2 3
CO4 1 2 1 3 1 1 2 2 1 3
CO5 1 1 1 3 3 1 2 2 1 3
Average Correlation
1 2 1 3 1 1 2 2 1 3
Level
132
19MEL41 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS AND METALLURGY LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To evaluate mechanical properties, micro structure of materials and its behaviour
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Estimate the mechanical properties of engineering materials
CO2 : Interpret the micro structure of engineering materials
CO3 : Comprehend the effect of heat treatment on metallic materials
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
MECHANICS OF SOLIDS LABORATORY
1. Tension test on mild steel rod in 30 T UTM
2. Torsion test on mild steel rod
3. Bending test on steel and aluminium beams to verify the Maxwells Law of reciprocal deflection
4. Brinell hardness test
5. Compression test on coiled and laminated springs
6. Impact test on metal specimen.
7. Vicker’s hardness test.
8. Tension test on plywood.
9. Torsion test on G.I wire.
10. Tests on wood.
11. Deflection test on wooden beams.
12. Compression test on wood in 30 T UTM.
13. Double shear test on mild steel.
14. Strain Measurement using Rosette strain gauge
METALLURGY LABORATORY
1. Metallographic sample preparation.
2. Phase diagram determination.
3. Microstructures of plain carbon steel.
4. Microstructures of cast iron.
5. Heat treatment of plain carbon steels.
6. Hardness measurement.
7. Phase analysis and porosity determination using image analysis software.
133
8. Microstructure of non-ferrous alloys.

9. Determination of grain size.
10. Study the properties of various types of plastics.
Total =45Periods

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
Outcome
Course
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
Average Correlation
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
Level
134
19MEL42 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the working principles of IC Engines, Compressors and the testing methods to measure
the performance of an IC engine
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Estimate the properties of fuels.
CO2 : Evaluate the performance of Diesel and Petrol Engines.
CO3 : Analyze the performance of Air compressor.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
FUEL LAB
1. Flash point and Fire point for given oil in Open cup apparatus.
2. Flash point and Fire point for given oil in closed cup apparatus.
3. Viscosity measurement using Redwood Viscometer.
4. Calorific value of fuels measurement using Bomb Calorimeter.
IC ENGINES LAB
1. Valve Timing diagram for Four Stroke Diesel Engine
2. Port Timing diagram for two stroke Petrol Engine.
3. Performance Test on 4 – stroke slow speed Diesel Engine.
4. Performance Test on 4- Stroke Petrol Engine.
5. Performance Test on 4-Stroke air cooled Diesel Engine.
6. Performance Test on 4-Stroke water cooled Diesel Engine.
7. Volumetric Efficiency 4- Stroke Diesel Engine.
8. Heat Balance test on 4 – stroke Diesel Engine.
9. Morse Test on Multi cylinder Petrol Engine.
10. Performance test on 4-Stroke water cooled Single cylinder diesel engine using PC interface.
11. Performance test on 4-Stroke water cooled twin cylinder diesel engine using PC interface.
135
12. Performance, emission and combustion characteristic of multi fuel engine test rig.
AIR COMPRESSOR LAB
1. Performance test on single stage reciprocating air compressor.
2. Performance test on two stage reciprocating air compressor.
3. Performance test on two stage rotary air compressor.
Total hours: 45

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
Outcome
Course
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
Average Correlation
3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
Level
136
19MEL43 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY-II LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To study and practice the basic machining operations in the special purpose machines and
acquire its applicability in the real time components manufacturing industries.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Demonstrate the method of prismatic and contour machining using milling machine
CO2: Prepare spur gear, helical gear and bevel gear using milling machine
CO3: Perform different grinding operations such as surface grinding, centerless grinding.
CO4: Develop simple sheet metal components
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Contour Milling using vertical milling machine
2. Spur Gear Cutting using milling machine
3. Gear Hobbing
4. Gear Shaping
5. Hexagonal Machining using Horizontal Milling Machine
6. Gear Cutting – Gear Shaping
7. Spline Broaching
8. Exercise in Surface Grinding
9. Exercise in Cylindrical Grinding
10.Exercise in Tool and Cutter Grinder
11.Helical gear cutting in Milling Machine
12. Study of Turret and Capstan lathe
13. Forming of Simple Components in Press Working and simple Calculations of sheet metal work
determination of cutting forces in Milling Machine
Total =45Periods
137

Mapping
CO1 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
Outcomes
CO2 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
Course
CO3 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1
Average Correlation
3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
Level
138
139
V SEMESTER
140
19MEC51 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To familiarize the various steps involved in the design process.
2. To understand the principles involved in evaluating the shape and dimensions of a component to
satisfy functional and strength requirements.
3. To learn to use standard practices and standard data
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Design the mechanical components under various stress conditions using theories of failure.
CO2: Apply the design procedure for designing torque transmitting elements such as shafts and
couplings
CO3: Determine the strength of different types of joints
CO4: Design the energy storing elements such as springs and flywheels.
CO5: Design Ball Bearing and Sliding contact bearings for different loading conditions as per
Manufacturer catalog.
Use of Design Data Book is recommended.

COURSE CONTENT:
Review of Simple Direct, Bending and Torsional stress – Impact and shock loading (Not for
examination)
UNIT 1: STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE
9 hrs
MEMBERS
Introduction to the design process - factors influencing machine design, selection of materials based
on mechanical properties - Preferred numbers, fits and tolerances – calculation of principal stresses
for combined load conditions – Design of curved beams – crane hook and ‘C’ frame - Factor of safety
- theories of failure – stress concentration – Fluctuating stresses – Endurance limit – Design for finite
and infinite life under variable loading – Exposure to standards.
141
UNIT 2: DESIGN OF SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS 9 hrs

Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed – Design of keys, key
ways and splines - Design of rigid and flexible couplings - Design of Connecting Rod.- Design of
crankshafts
UNIT 3: DESIGN OF TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS 9 hrs

Threaded fasteners - Design of bolted joints including eccentric loading, Knuckle joints, Cotter joints
– Design of welded joints, riveted joints for structures - theory of bonded joints.
UNIT 4: DESIGN OF ENERGY STORING ELEMENTS 9 hrs

Design of helical, leaf, disc and torsional springs under constant loads and varying loads – Concentric
torsion springs - rubber springs - Design of flywheels considering stresses in rims and arms for
engines and punching machines.
UNIT 5: DESIGN OF BEARINGS 9 hrs

Selection of Rolling Contact bearings - Hertz contact stresses, stribeck’s equation - Design of
hydrodynamic journal bearings, McKee's Equation, Petroff’s law, Sommerfield Number, Raimondi &
Boyd graphs - Hydrostatic lubrication, Hydrostatic step bearing.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Richard G Budynas and J Keith Nisbett, Shigley’s “Mechanical Engineering Design”, Tata
McGraw-Hill, 2017.
2. Bhandari V.B, “Design of Machine Elements”, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co,
2017.
3. Spotts M.F., Shoup T.E., Hornberge.L.E. “Design and Machine Elements” Pearson Education,
2019.
REFERENCES:
1. Sundararajamoorthy T. V, Shanmugam .N, "Machine Design", Anuradha Publications, Chennai,
2018.
2. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design: Vol 1& 2”, Jaico Publishing Co, 2006.
3. Ugural A.C, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Approach”, McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2015.
142
4. R.S. Khurmi & J.K.Gupta, “ A Text book of Machine Design”, S Chand, 2014.
5. Design Data: Data Book Of Engineers By PSG College-Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2012.

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
Average
3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
Correlation Level
143
19MEC52 THEORY OF MACHINES-II

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about force analysis of machinery, balancing of rotating and reciprocating
masses, Gyroscopes, Energy fluctuation in Machines, fundamentals in vibration and vibration
analysis of single degree of freedom systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Perform static and dynamic analysis of mechanical systems.
CO2: Apply the principle of balancing in rotating and reciprocating mass system.
CO3: Analyze the vibrations in mechanical systems.
CO4: Apply the knowledge of vibration control on mechanical systems.
CO5: Analyze the effect of gyroscopic couple and performance of different types of governor.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: FORCE ANALYSIS 9 hrs

Applied and Constrained Forces – Free body diagrams – static Equilibrium conditions – Two, Three
and four members – Static Force analysis in simple machine members – Dynamic Force Analysis ––
DAlembert’s principle – superposition principle –Dynamic Analysis in reciprocating engines –Gas
forces -Inertia effect of connecting rod –Bearing loads -Crank shaft torque-Turning moment diagrams
–Flywheels- Flywheels of punching presses.
UNIT 2: BALANCING 9 hrs

Static and dynamic Balancing-Balancing of rotating masses-Balancing a single cylinder engine-
Balancing of multi cylinder inline, V-engines-Partial Balancing in engines-Balancing of linkages-
Balancing Machines-Field balancing of discs and rotor.
144
UNIT 3: FREE VIBRATION 9 hrs

Basic features of vibratory systems – Degrees of freedom – Free vibration – Equations of motion –
Natural frequency – Types of Damping – Damped vibration– Torsional Vibration of shaft – Critical
speeds of shafts – Two and three rotor torsional systems.
UNIT 4: FORCED VIBRATION 9 hrs

Forced Vibration-Forced damped vibration–Magnification Factor-Force transmissibility and
amplitude transmissibility –vibration isolation. Selection of vibration measuring instruments –
accelerometer – dynamic properties and selection of structural materials for vibration control.
UNIT 5: MECHANISM FOR CONTROL 9 hrs

Gyroscope – gyroscopic couples Gyroscopic action on vehicles-two wheelers, four wheelers, air
planes and ships - Stability of an automobile – stability of a two wheel vehicle –Stabilization of ship.
Governors – types – centrifugal governors – gravity controlled and spring controlled centrifugal
governors – characteristics – effect of friction – controlling force.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. J. J Uicker (Jr), G. R Pennock, and J. E Shigley, “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, 3rd
Ed., Oxford International Student Edition, 2014.
2. S Rao and R V Dukkipat, “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, 2nd Ed., New Age Intl., 2008
REFERENCES:
1. S. S. Rattan, “Theory of Machines”, 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. T. Bevan. “Theory of Machines”, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2005.
3. L. Meirovitch, “Elements of Vibration Analysis”,2nd Ed., McGraw Hill, 2014.
4. W. T. Thomson and M.D. Dahleh, “Theory of Vibration with Applications”, 5th Ed., Pearson
Education, 2008.
5. J. S. Brar, R. K. Bansal, “A Text Book of Theory of Machines”, Laxmi publications, 2016.
145

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
Average
3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1
Correlation Level
146
19MEC53 FLUID MACHINERY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire knowledge on fluid machines such as pumps, hydraulic turbines, steam turbines and gas
turbines.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Analyze the performance of various hydraulic turbines and characteristic curves
CO2: Analyze the performance of centrifugal pumps
CO3: Analyze the performance of positive displacement pumps.
CO4: Evaluate the performance of steam nozzles and steam turbines through velocity triangles,
CO5: Analyze various types of Gas turbines
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: HYDRAULIC TURBINES 9 hrs

Impact of jets - Velocity triangles - Theory of roto-dynamic machines - Classification of turbines –
Pelton wheel, Francis turbine (inward and outward) and Kaplan turbine- Working principles - Work
done by water on the runner - Efficiencies – Draft tube - Specific speed -Unit Quantities –
Characteristic Performance curves for turbines – Governing of turbines.
UNIT 2: CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 9 hrs

Introduction – Main parts of Centrifugal pump– Work done by the Impeller - Heads and efficiencies–
Velocity triangles- Minimum starting speed – Multistage –Specific speed – Model testing – Priming
– Characteristic curves- Cavitations- NPSH performance curves
UNIT 3: POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS 9 hrs

Introduction – Main parts of reciprocating pump – Working principle- indicator diagram and it’s
variations – Problems -Air vessels- Rotary pumps – Vane , Lobe, Gear oil , Screw , Rotary plunger.
147
UNIT 4: STEAM NOZZLE AND STEAM TURBINES 9 hrs

Types and Shapes of nozzles, Flow of steam through nozzles, Critical pressure ratio, Variation of
mass flow rate with pressure ratio. Effect of friction. Metastable flow.
Impulse and reaction principles, Velocity diagrams, Work done and efficiency – optimal operating
conditions. Multi-staging, compounding and governing
UNIT 5: GAS TURBINES 9 hrs

Classification, open and closed cycle, gas turbine fuels, actual Brayton cycle, optimum pressure ratio
for maximum thermal efficiency, work ratio, air rate, effect of operating variables on the thermal
efficiency and work ratio, and air rate, simple open cycle turbine with regeneration, reheating and
Intercooling, Combined steam and gas turbine plant, requirements of combustion chamber, types of
combustion chambers.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bansal R.K., “A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines”, Lakshmi Publications,
2018.
2. Ballaney. P, “Thermal Engineering”, 25th Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2017.
3. Yahya.S.M, “Turbines, Compressors and fans”, 4th Edition , Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Rajput R.K., “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, S.Chand& Co., 2016
2. Subramanya, “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic machines”, McGraw Hill Education India,
2018.
3. SK. Som, “Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic machines”, McGraw Hill
Education India, 2017
4. Domkundwar, Kothandaraman, &Domkundwar, “ A Course in Thermal Engineering”, 6 th
Edition, DhanpatRai& Sons, 2016.
5. Gupta H.N, “Fundamentals of Internal Combustion Engines”, 2nd Edition Prentice Hall of
India, 2013.
6. Mathur M.L and Mehta F.S., “Thermal Science and Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Jain Brothers
Pvt. Ltd, 2017.
148

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
Average
3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
Correlation Level
149
19MEH51 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To impart knowledge to the students about the fundamental economic concepts applicable to
engineering design and decision making.
2. To develop the ability to understand the time value of money and apply various methods of
economic analysis of alternatives.
3. To acquaint the students about replacement decisions, depreciation calculations and the
significance of inflation factor.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the basics of economics concepts like demand and supply, break even analysis and
P/V ratio
CO2: Calculate the growth of money.
CO3: Compare alternatives of projects using cash flow analysis.
CO4: Analyze the economic life and maintenance of the asset
CO5: Analyze the project implementation feasibility and impact of inflation on economy.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 9 hrs

Introduction to Economics- Flow in an economy, Law of supply and demand, Concept of Engineering
Economics – Types of efficiency , Scope of engineering economics- Element of costs, Marginal cost,
Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Opportunity cost, Break-even analysis- P / V ratio, Elementary economic
Analysis – Material selection for product Design selection for a product, Process planning.
UNIT 2 : VALUE ENGINEERING AND INTEREST FACTORS 9 hrs

Make or buy decision, Value engineering – Function, aims, and Value engineering procedure. Interest
formulae and their applications –Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor, Single
payment present worth factor, Equal payment series compound amount factor , Equal payment series
150
sinking fund factor, Equal payment series payment Present worth factor,Equal payment series capital
recovery factor-Uniform gradient series annual equivalent factor, Effective interest rate, Examples in all
the methods.
UNIT 3: CASH FLOW 9 hrs

Methods of comparison of alternatives – present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram),
Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram),
Annual equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram),
rate of return method.
UNIT 4: REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9 hrs

Replacement and Maintenance analysis – Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem,
determination of economic life of an asset, Replacement of an asset with a new asset – capital recovery
with return and concept of challenger and defender, Simple probabilistic model for items which fail
completely.
UNIT 5: DEPRECIATION AND INFLATION 9 hrs

Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of
depreciation-Sum of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation, service
output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public alternatives- introduction, Inflation adjusted decisions
– procedure to adjust inflation, comparison of alternatives and determination of economic life of asset.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. PanneerSelvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 2013.
2. James L Riggs, “Engineering Economics”, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co., New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCES:
1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2016.
2. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan,
New York, 2011.
3. N.Gregory Mankiw, “Principles of Economics”, Thomson, 2016.
4. Sullivan W.G., Bontadelli J.A. and Wicks E.M., “Engineering Economy “, 11th ed.,
Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2001
151

Mapping PO1 PO1 PO1
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
0 1 2
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 2
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 2
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 2
CO5 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 2
Average
Correlatio 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 2
n Level
152
19MEL51 THEORY OF MACHINES LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart practical knowledge on design and analysis of mechanisms for the specified type of motion
in a machine. To understand machine kinematics and dynamics with the study of rigid bodies
motions and forces for the transmission systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Analyze motion of mechanisms and its inversion.
CO2: Generate Cam profile for different motion.
CO3: Build gear trains and compute velocity ratio.
CO4: Sketch the characteristics curves of governor and inspect the effect of gyroscopic effect and
couple on motorized gyroscope
CO5: Examine balancing for rotating and reciprocating mass system and perform the vibration
analysis on mechanical systems.
COURSE CONTENT:
KINEMATICS 22 hrs
1. Plot displacement, velocity and acceleration diagram for slider crank mechanism.
2. Determination of Coriolli’s component of acceleration.
3. Build and analyze various types of mechanism and gear trains using MAKEIT Kit.
4. Draw cam profile of a given cam and study the jump phenomenon.
5. Determine coefficient of friction of given belt material and asses slip characteristic of belt
drive.
DYNAMICS 23hrs
1. To evaluate the Performance of Watt, Porter, Proell and Hartnell governors.
153
2. Verification of Gyroscopic principle and determination of gyroscopic couple.

3. Determination of critical speed of shaft.
4. Balancing of reciprocating masses and rotating masses.
5. Determination of damping co-efficient of single degree of freedom system.
6. Measurement of natural frequency and modal shape of simply supported beam, cantilever
beam and circular disc with and without absorber by the method of impact hammer.
7. Determination of torsional frequencies for compound pendulum and flywheel system with
lumped Moment of inertia.
Total Hours: 45Hrs

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
Average Correlation
3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
Level
154
19MEL52 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The students can easily understand the concept of fluid mechanics by flow through different cross
sections and perform calculations related to losses in pipes. Also conduct performance test on pumps
and turbines to draw various characteristic curves.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Demonstrate Bernoulli’s theorem and Reynold’s experiment.
CO2: Apply Bernoulli’s theorem to measure the flow using Orifice meter, Venturi meter.
CO3: Determine the energy losses in pipes and metacentric height of floating bodies.
CO4: Analyze the performance characteristics of pumps.
CO5: Analyze the performance characteristics of turbines.
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Verification of Bernoulli‘s Theorem using Bernoulli‘s Apparatus.
2. Determination of Reynold’s number and verification of the flow types.
3. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given flow measuring apparatus.
4. Calibration of the rate of flow using Rotameter.
5. Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes.
6. Determination of metacentric height.
7. Conduct performance test on positive displacement pumps and draw the characteristic curves.
8. Conduct performance test on Centrifugal pumps and draw the characteristic curves.
9. Conduct performance test on impulse turbine and draw the characteristic curves.
10. Conduct performance test on reaction turbine and draw the characteristic curves.
Total Hours: 45
155

Mapping
CO1 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
CO4 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
Average
Correlation 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1
Level
156
Non Credit
19CEZ51 SOFT SKILL EMPLOYMENT TRAINING
Course
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To develop requisite knowledge in soft skills and employment
• To carry out the task professionally in systematic way with total

customer satisfaction
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Develop interpersonal, communication and leadership skills and write well-structured and
easily readable reports e-mails
CO2: Develop Neuro Linguistic Programming (NLP) skills to lead the peak performance
CO3: Prepare the students to face Interviews
CO4: Make the students to feel employable
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: HUMAN VALUES 9 hrs

Views of Indian Philosophers Thiruvalluvar, Mahathma Gandhi and Dr. Abdul kalam on human
values: Truth and Altruism for Real Leadership, Sovereignty, Western Philosopher Leo Tolstoy
views on human values. Self Realisation: Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and meditation for
professional excellence and stress management, not falling in conformity and conflict of interest.
UNIT 2: SOFT SKILLS 9 hrs
Interpersonal Skills; Team work, Recognition and reward Communication Skills; Listening to the
conversation-Introducing oneself before audience-Group discussion-Formal Letter writing-E-mail
Etiquettes-Power point presentation Leadership Skills; creating win-win situation, modeling the great
leaders with inspiration
UNIT 3: NEURO-LINGUISTIC PROGRAMMING(NLP): 9 hrs
Achieving Business Excellence with NLP, elements of NLP, using NLP in business, enhancing
interpersonal effectiveness, leading peak performance, improving business results. Enriched
communication; Adapting to others’ preferences, language in various senses, use of enriched language
in business.
157
UNIT 4: PREPARATION FOR INTERVIEWS 9 hrs

Preparation of Resume - Difference between Bio-data and CV- Visiting Company Web site -
Gathering Information about Company - Mode of Selection - Different types of Selection Methods –
Pre-placement Talk - Attitude before Interview
UNIT 5: INTERVIEW SKILLS 9 hrs
Body Language - Types of Interview - Attending Telephonic Interview – Do’s and Don’ts during and
after the Interview - Expectation of the Interviewer - Mock Interview.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sue Knight, NLP at Work, Nicholas Brealey Publishing,2009
2. Lynne Cooper, Business NLP for Dummies, Wiley Publications, U.K. Edition, 2010.
3. Dr. K.Alex, Soft Skills, know yourself and know the world, 2nd Edtion, S Chand Publication
New Delhi, 2015.
4. Anderson, P.V, Technical Communication, Thomson Wadsworth, 9th Ed., New Delhi, 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Thiruvalluvar, ‘Thirukural’ Related chapters on Human values
2. Dr. A.P.J. Abdulkalam ‘ You are Unique’, Punya Publishing Pvt.Ltd, 2012
3. Leo Tolstoy, ‘ Wise thoughts for every day life’ Arcade Publishing, New York. 2005.
4. Bob Proctor, “ You were born rich” Life success productions, 2016.
CO1 3 2 3 3 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO4 2 3 2 3
CO5 2 3 2 3
Average
3 3 3 2 3 3 3
Correlation Level
158
159
VI SEMESTER
160
19MEC61 DESIGN OF MECHANICAL DRIVES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of power transmission components
with the usage of standard data and catalogues
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the student will able to
CO1: Design the components for belt and rope drive systems.
CO2: Design spur and helical gear using standard procedures for a given application
CO3: Design gears for power transmission systems with intersecting & non-intersecting shaft axis
CO4: Design of variable speed gear boxes for given application
CO5: Design the various type of clutch and brake
Use of Design Data Book is recommended.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEEMNTS 9 hrs

Selection of flat belts and pulleys - Selection of V belts and pulleys – Wire ropes and pulleys –
Selection of transmission chains and sprockets.
UNIT 2: SPUR GEARS AND PARALLEL AXIS HELICAL GEARS 9 hrs

Gear Terminology-Speed ratios and number of teeth-Force analysis – Tooth stresses –Dynamic
effects – Fatigue strength – Factor of safety – Gear materials –Design of straight tooth spur & helical
gears based on strength and wear considerations– Pressure angle in the normal and transverse plane –
Equivalent number of teeth-forces on helical gears.
UNIT 3: BEVEL, WORM AND CROSS HELICAL GEARS 9 hrs

Straight bevel gear: Tooth terminology, tooth forces and stresses, equivalent number of teeth
estimating the dimensions of pair of straight bevel gears. Worm Gear – Terminology, Thermal
161
Capacity, Materials-forces and stresses, efficiency, estimating the size of the worm gear pair. Cross
helical gear Terminology-helix angles – Estimating the size of the pair of cross helical gears.
UNIT 4: GEAR BOXES 9 hrs

Need of gear box- Design of sliding mesh gear box- Constant mesh gearbox Speed selection-
Geometric progression – Standard step ratio – Ray diagram, kinematic layout – Determination of
number of teeth - Design of multi speed gear box for machine tool applications. Introduction to
Variable speed gear box - Fluid Couplings - Torque Converters – Continuous variable transmission
system
UNIT 5: CLUTCHES AND BRAKES 9 hrs

Design of plate clutches – axial clutches-cone clutches-internal expanding rim clutches- Band and
Block brakes -external shoe brakes – Internal expanding shoe brake- Disc brake.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett, “Mechanical Engineering Design”, 11th Ed., Tata McGraw-
Hill, 2019.
2. Sundararajamoorthy T. V and Shanmugam .N, "Machine Design", Anuradha publications,
Chennai, 2018.
3. Robert L Norton, “Machine Design - An Integrated Approach”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2018.
REFERENCES:
1) Maitra G.M. and Prasad L.V., “Hand book of Mechanical Design”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2001.
2) Bhandari V.B, “Design of Machine Elements”, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 2017.
3) R. C. Juvinall and K. M Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Component Design”, 3rd Ed., Wiley Student
Edition, 2011.
4) A. H. Burr and J. B. Cheatham, “Mechanical Analysis and Design”, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2001.
5) Ugural A,C, "Mechanical Design, An Integrated Approach", Tata McGraw-Hill , 2016.
6) U.C.Jindal, “Machine Design”, Dorling Kindersley,2010
7) Design Data: Data Book of Engineers By PSG College-Kalaikathir Achchagam, 2019.
162

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
Average
3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2
Correlation Level
163
19MEC62 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn about the various modes and mechanism of heat transfer and mass transfer, their analysis and
applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Analyze the rate of heat flow in steady state and transient state conduction systems
CO2 : Determine the temperature variations and rate of heat flow in convection heat transfer problems.
CO3 : Apply the concepts of radiation heat transfer in practical problems.
CO4 : Analyze the phase change heat transfer and heat exchangers.
CO5 : Explain the phenomenon of diffusion mass transfer and its analysis.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: CONDUCTION 9 hrs

Introduction-Modes of heat transfer-Fourier law of conduction-General heat conduction equation in
Cartesian co-ordinates and cylindrical coordinates-One dimensional steady state heat conduction –
plane wall-hollow cylinder, sphere-Numerical problems-Composite systems with combined
mechanism-electrical analogy-critical thickness of insulation- numerical problems-Conduction with
internal heat generation - Extended surfaces-Unsteady state heat conduction – Lumped analysis-
Infinite and semi infinite solids.- Use of Heislers Chart.
UNIT 2: CONVECTION 9 hrs

Introduction-Forced convection- Hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layers - Flow over flat plates-
laminar boundary layer thickness in terms of Reynolds number - Flow through tubes-Flow across
cylinder- Nusselt equations. Free convection - Hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layers-Horizontal
and vertical plates-Horizontal and vertical cylinders - Nusselt equation.
164
UNIT 3: RADIATION 9 hrs

Introduction-Radiation laws, Black Body and Gray body Radiation. Shape Factor. Electrical Analogy.
Radiation Shields. Gas Radiation.
UNIT 4: BOILING, CONDENSATION AND HEAT EXCHANGERS 9 hrs

Boiling and Condensation – regimes of boiling – forced convection boiling – Nusselt’s theory of
condensation – film wise and drop wise condensation. Heat exchanger - Types – Analysis – LMTD
and NTU method –Effectiveness - overall heat transfer coefficient – fouling factors.
UNIT 5: MASS TRANSFER 9 hrs

Basic Concepts – Diffusion Mass Transfer – Fick’s Law of Diffusion – Steady state Molecular
Diffusion. Convective Mass Transfer – Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer Analogy – Convective
Mass Transfer Correlations.
Total Hours :45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sachdeva R.C., “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass Transfer”, New Age
International Publishers, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Kothandaraman C.P., “Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer”, New Age International
Publishers, New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Frank P Incropera and David P. Dewitt, “Fundamentals of Engineering Heat and Mass
Transfer”, John Wiley and Sons, 2010.
2. Holman J.P., “Heat and Mass Transfer”, Tata McGrawHill, 2010.
3. Yadav R., “Heat and Mass Transfer”, Central Publishing House, Allahabad, 2010.
4. Ozisik M.N., “Heat Transfer”, McGraw Hill Book Co., 2005.
5. Yunus A Cengel, “Heat Transfer”,5th Ed., McGraw Hill Company, 2014.
6. R K Rajput , “Heat and Mass Transfer” S.Chand & Co, 2019.
165

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
Average
3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 2
Correlation Level
166
19MEC63 MECHATRONICS
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce and impart knowledge about the need, role, components and application of
multidisciplinary systems for the automation of mechanical systems and processes
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the need and components of mechatronic system and different types of signal
processing
CO2: Select the right type of sensor for measuring process parameters based on performance
characteristics
CO3: Explain the different types of drives as actuators for mechatronic application
CO4: Develop assembly language programs and ladder logic programs for control applications
CO5: Apply the knowledge about mechatronic system for the automation of mechanical system.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION 9 hrs

Introduction to Mechatronics Systems - Concepts of Mechatronics design approach - Need for
Mechatronics - Components of Mechatronics System - Analog and Digital signals - Number systems
– Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal – introduction to signal processing - Analog to Digital
and Digital to Analog converters
UNIT 2: SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 9 hrs

Introduction – Performance characteristics – Sensors for mechatronics systems – Motion sensors -
Proximity sensor – Force sensor – Pressure sensor – Temperature sensor – sensors for flow and
Liquid level measurement – Light sensor - Selection of sensors
UNIT 3: ACTUATORS 9 hrs
167
Mechanical drives – types, components and application – CAMS – indexing mechanisms - Electrical
drives – AC and DC motors – types – characteristics and application – Stepper motor – servo motor -
Fluid power drives – Hydraulic and Pneumatic systems – components and application
UNIT 4: PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS 9 hrs

Microprocessor - 8085A – architecture, instruction set & programming – introduction to
programmable peripheral interface for 8085 A - interfacing of ADC and DAC with 8085
microprocessor – 8051 microcontroller – architecture – PID controllers – types, circuit and
Input/Output characteristics - Programmable Logic controller (PLC) – configuration – programming
and application – introduction to SCADA
UNIT 5: MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS AND DESIGN 9 hrs

Case studies of Mechatronics systems- Pick and place Robot- Autonomous mobile robot-Wireless
surveillance balloon- Engine Management system - Automatic car park barrier - Designing
Microprocessor / Microcontroller based mechanical systems like temperature control of a furnace,
Refrigeration and Air conditioning systems and house hold appliances.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. W.Bolton “Mechatronics – Electronic Control systems in Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering”, Pearson Education,1st Edition, 2015.
2. Nitaigour Premchand Malik,”Mechatronics-Principles, Concepts and Applications”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 1st Edition, 2017
REFERENCES:
1) Anthony Espsito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Pearson Education, 6th edition, 2011
2) Gaonkar, R. S., “Microprocessor architecture, programming, and applications with the 8085”,
Penram International Publishing (India), Delhi, 2000
3) HMT Ltd, “Mechatronics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1st edition, 2000
4) E-Learning : Mechatronics and Automation Engineering - NPTEL – IITG
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103174/
168

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 3 3
Average
3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 3
Correlation Level
169
19MEH61 OPERATIONAL RESEARCH

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Understand the techniques for solving linear, nonlinear and dynamic programming problems and
apply knowledge of Operation research techniques to industrial problems
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Formulate and solve industrial problems using LPP and Graphical methods.
CO2: Solve sequencing, transportation and assignment problems using various OR methods.
CO3: Select appropriate inventory method suited for particular application.
CO4: Analyse the time and cost constraints for project management.
CO5: Solve dynamic and nonlinear problems
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: LINEAR MODELS 9 hrs

Introduction to Operation Research(OR) - General methodology of OR- Applications of OR to
industrial application problems- LPP formulation – Graphical method– Simplex algorithm – Duality
formulation – Sensitivity analysis.
UNIT 2: SEQUENCING AND TRANSPORTATION MODELS 9 hrs

Sequencing –Problem with N jobs with ‘M’ machines- Transportation problems - Northwest Corner
method – Vogel’s Approximation method-MODI method -Optimal solutions. Assignment problems
- Hungarian algorithm - Travelling salesman problem - Applications
UNIT 3: INVENTORY MODELS 9 hrs

Inventory models – Economic order quantity models – Quantity discount models – Stochastic
inventory models – Multi product models – Inventory control models in practice.
170
UNIT 4: NETWORK TECHNIQUES 9 hrs

Shortest path model - minimum spanning Tree Problem - Max-Flow problem and Min-cost problem -
Phases of project management - guidelines for network construction – CPM and PERT– Time – cost
trade off - Resource Analysis in Network Scheduling.
UNIT 5: DYNAMIC AND NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM 9 hrs

Dynamic programming models - Optimality principle – Deterministic DP Applications – Formulation
of NLPP - Constrained and Unconstrained optimization – Kuhn-Tucker conditions.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Prem Kumar Gupta, D.S. Hira, "Operations Research”, S.Chand& Company Ltd, New Delhi, 6th
edition, 2017..
2. Taha, H.A. “Operations Research: An Introduction”, Pearson Education Inc., Prentice Hall of
India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 9th Edition, 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Kanti Swarup, P.K. Gupta and Man Mohan, “Operation Research”, Sultan Chand & sons,
New Delhi, 16th edition, 2014.
2. J.K.Sharma, “Operations Research Theory and Applications”, Macmillan, 5th Edition, 2017.
3. Wayne L. Winston, “Operations Research” Cengage Learning, 4th Edition, 2009.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 2
Average
3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 3 3 2
Correlation Level
171
19MEZ61 DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROJECT

L T P C
0 0 6 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To work as a team and identify, conceive, formulate, design and fabricate a functional mechanical
component/ system based on mechanical design principles
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Develops the quality to work as a team.
CO2:
CO3: Use appropriate procedure to design mechanical components.

CO4: Identify suitable manufacturing procedures and methods to assemble the components.
CO5: Demonstrate the fabricated model or prototype
Design and fabrication project work is a group (of 2 to 4 students) activity which will be supervised
by a project mentor. Each group has to choose a project which can be physical working models,
prototypes, scaled models, attachments used in machine tools, components of automotive systems,
mechanisms used in assembly line, robot etc.,
The progress of the project work is evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews reviewed by a
committee constituted by the Head of the Department.
The project reports should contain the following details: Background, Methodology (fabrication),
CAD Models (Assembly/Detail Drawing) of the chosen concept, Cost Estimation, etc.
The final evaluation is based on demonstration of the fabricated model, oral presentation and project
report by panel of examiners.
172

Mapping
CO1 1 2 2 2 2 1 3 3 2 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 2
CO5 3 2 3 3 1 3 2
Average
3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 3 3 2
Correlation Level
173
19MEL61 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To evaluate the heat transfer properties of material and performance of thermal systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Predict the thermal conductivity of given materials
CO2 : Estimate the heat transfer coefficient in natural and forced convection fields
CO3 : Determine the emissivity of a radiating surface
CO4 : Evaluate the performance of heat exchangers
CO5 : Assess the performance of refrigeration and air-conditioning systems.
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Determination of Thermal Conductivity of Insulation Material in Lagged Pipe apparatus.
2. Determination of Thermal Conductivity in guarded hot plate apparatus.
3. Determination of thermal conductivity of a composite wall and insulating powder.
4. Determination of heat transfer co-efficient in Vertical tube apparatus for Natural Convection.
5. Determination of Heat transfer from pin-fin under natural and forced convection.
6. Determination of Emissivity using Stefan Boltzmann Apparatus.
7. Determination of emissivity of a radiating surface.
8. Determination of heat transfer co-efficient of Parallel flow and Counter flow Heat Exchangers
9. Determination of heat transfer co-efficient of Shell and tube Heat Exchangers.
10. Determination of Coefficient of Performance of a vapor compression refrigeration system.
11. Determination of Coefficient of Performance of Air-conditioning system.
12. Determination of Coefficient of Performance of water cooler refrigeration.
13. Study of factors affecting the rate of Evaporation:
i) Effect of Surface Area. ii) Effect of Temperature.
14. Study the characteristics of Cooling Tower experiment.
15. Calculate the diffusion coefficient of vapor in still Air. ( Liquid – Liquid).
Total Hours 45
174

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
Average
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
Correlation Level
175
19MEL62 AUTOMATION LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide an experience to the students in designing fluid power circuits and developing programs
for control of different types of drive systems using microprocessor, microcontrollers and PLC and
hence to relate the same in the field of automation
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Develop assembly language programs for data processing and control using
microprocessor/microcontroller
CO2: Evaluate the characteristics of sensors
CO3: Design fluid power circuits using simulation software
CO4: Interface fluid power circuits with PLC for exercising automated control
COURSE CONTENT:
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Assembly language program for data processing using 8085 processor
2. Speed control of stepper motor using 8085 processor
3. Assembly language program for data processing using 8051 microcontroller
4. Program for control applications using 8051 microcontroller
5. Determination of performance characteristics of sensors (inductive, capacitive, optical etc)
6. Design and simulation of fluid power circuits using manual/mechanical control
7. Design and simulation of fluid power circuits using electrical control
8. Design and simulation of fluid power circuits using PLC control
Total Hours: 45
176

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 3 3 2
Outcomes
Course
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 3 3 2
Average
3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 3 3 2
Correlation Level
177
VII SEMESTER
178
19MEC71 ENGINEERING METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about principles of metrology and measurements, selection of measuring
instruments and to familiarize machine tool metrology and nano metrology.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the basic concept of measurements.
CO2: Select suitable instrument for linear, angular and taper measurements.
CO3: Identify the form errors.
CO4: Measure the surface characteristics.
CO5: Describe the instruments for mechanical measurement and nano metrology.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: CONCEPT OF MEASUREMENT 9 hrs

. General concept – Generalized measurement system – Units and standards – Measuring instruments –
Sensitivity, readability, range of accuracy, precision-static and dynamic response – Repeatability –
Systematic and random errors – Correction, calibration, interchangeability and limit gauges- Gauge
design. Tolerance analysis in manufacturing and assembly.
UNIT 2: LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENT 9 hrs

Measurement: Introduction to: Linear measurements - Vernier, micrometer and slip gauges, Angular
measurement – sine bar, angle gauges, spirit level and optical angular measurements. and comparators-
alignment and testing methods - mechanical, optical, electrical, pneumatic instruments. Simple
problems.
UNIT 3: FORM MEASUREMENT 9 hrs
179
Optical Measurement and Interferometry: Introduction- Optical Measurement Techniques-

Interferometry-Interferometers- Scales, Gratings, and Reticles. Metrology of Gears and Screw
Threads: Introduction - Errors in Spur Gears, Measurement of Gear Elements, Gear Inspection -
Parkinson Gear Tester- Measurement of Screw Threads. Simple problems.
UNIT 4: METROLOGY OF SURFACE FINISH 9 hrs

Metrology of Surface Finish- Introduction- Specification of Surface Texture Characteristics, Methods
of Measuring Surface Finish, Stylus Probe Instruments, Methods for measuring Surface Roughness,
Coordinate Measuring Machines, Machine Tool Metrology- alignment and testing methods ,
Automated Inspection, Applications of Machine Vision in Inspection.
9
UNIT 5: MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS AND NANO METROLOGY
hrs
Power: mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic and electrical type – Flow measurement: Venturi, orifice,
rotameter, pitot tube – Temperature: bimetallic strip, pressure thermometers, thermocouples and
electrical resistance thermistor – Pyrometers. Nano impact of metrology- Introduction - Importance of
Nanometrology, SEM, TEM, STM, AFM, XRD.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. C.S. Rangan, G.R. Sharma, V.S.V. Mani “Instrumentation Devices and systems”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
2. J.P. Jack Holman “Experimental Methods for Engineers”- McGraw Hill, New York, 2011.
3. Ernest O. Doebelin “ Measurement Systems, Application and Design”, McGraw Hill, New
York, 2017
REFERENCES:
1. Benjamin Kuo: “Automotive Control Engineering”, EEE Publications, 2014.
2. Beckwith, T.C & Buck, N.L.: “Mechanical Measurements”, Addison Wesley,2013.
180

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 1
Average Correlation
3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
Level
181
19MEL71 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS LABORATORY

L T P C
1 0 4 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the concepts of Mathematical Modeling and Finite Element Method for solving
Engineering Problems using software tools.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Generate the Finite Element equations for systems governed by differential equations
CO2: Solve the Structural Engineering Problems using FEA software
CO3: Solve the Multi-Dimensional heat transfer problems using FEA software
CO4: Interpret FEA results of Modal analysis for structural members
CO5: Formulate the FEM for Nonlinear analysis
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS 10 hrs

Finite Element Analysis - Definition and Process- Discretizing and Characteristics of Finite Elements
– Degree of Freedom – Common FEA Assumptions – Approximate methods – Introduction to
Commercial finite element software.
Lab Exercise:
• Develop the mathematic model for physical phenomena in different fields.
• Solve the differential equations using various approximate methods.
UNIT 2: APPLICATION OF ANSYS TO STRESS ANALYSIS 20 hrs

Introduction – Drive Finite element Equations for One Dimensional elements (Bar, Beam, Truss) and
Two-Dimensional Solids (Triangular, Rectangular and Quadrilateral Elements) – Higher Order
Elements
Lab Exercise:
182
• Stress analysis - Bars of constant cross section area, tapered cross section area and stepped bar -
Trusses
• Beam analysis – Simply supported, cantilever, fixed beams with point load, UDL, UVL, etc
• Stress Analysis of a Rectangular Plate with a circular Hole
• Stress Analysis of Axisymmetric Problems
UNIT 3: FEM FOR HEAT TRANSFER PROBLEMS 10 hrs

Field Problems – weighted Residual Approach for FEM – 1D and 2D Heat Transfer problem
Lab Exercise:
• Thermal Analysis – 1D & 2D problem with conduction and convection boundary conditions
UNIT 4: VIBRATION ANALYSIS 10 hrs

Review of basic dynamic equations – Element mass matrices – free vibration frequencies and mode
shapes. Eigen Values and Eigen vectors.
Lab Exercise:
• Fixed-Fixed beam for natural frequency determination
• Bar subjected to forcing function
• Fixed-Fixed beam subjected to forcing function
UNIT 5: INTRODUCTION TO NONLINEAR ANALYSIS 10 hrs

Fundamentals of Nonlinear Analysis – Classifications of Nonlinear Behavior – Large deformations –
Material – Contact.
Lab Exercise:
• How to extend FEM to non-linear problems
• Demonstrate contact analysis with different surface contacts.
Total Hours 60
TEXT BOOKS:
1. .N.Reddy, “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, McGraw Hill Education,2017
183
2. Witt Robert D.Cook, Malkus, Plesha,”Concepts and Applications of Finite Elements Analysis”,
Wiley,2007
3. Mary Kathryn Thompson, John Martin Thompson, “ANSYS Mechanical APDL for finite
Element Analysis” Butterworth-Heinemann,2017
REFERENCES:
1. K J Bathe, “Finite element procedures”, Prentice Hall, Indian edition, 2006
2. J Fish and T Belytschko, “A first course in finite elements”, Wiley, USA, 2007
3. R D Cook, D A Malkus, M E Plesha, RJ Witt, “Concepts and Applications of finite element
analysis”, John Wiley & Sons, 4th edition, 2002
4. Saeed Moaveni, “Finite Element Analysis – Theory and Application with ANSYS”, Prentice
Hall, 1999
5. Erdogan Madenci, Ibrahim Guven,”The Finite Element Method and Applications in Engineering
Using ANSYS” Springer Science – Business Media, 2006
6. Esam M. Alawadhi, “Finite Element Simulations Using ANSYS”, Taylor & Francis, 2010
7. ANSYS® APDL Mechanical User’s Guide Release 14.5
Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 1
Average
3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3 1
Correlation Level
184
ENGINEERING METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS

19MEL72
LABORATORY
L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide hands on experience to use metrology instruments for calibration and evaluation of
dimensional and geometrical characteristics.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Calibrate the measuring instruments
CO2: Measure the linear and angular values using precision measuring instruments
CO3: Examine the geometrical characteristic of threaded fasteners and gears.
CO4: Examine the limits of dimensional tolerances using comparators.
CO5: Use suitable instruments to measure mechanical parameters
COURSE CONTENT:
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Calibration of Vernier / Micrometer / Dial Gauge
2. Checking Dimensions of part using slip gauges
3. Measurements of Gear Tooth Dimensions
4. Measurement of Taper Angle using sine bar / Tool makers microscope
5. Measurement of straightness and flatness
6. Measurement using Bore Gauge and Depth gauge
7. Measurement of thread parameters
8. Checking the limits of dimensional tolerances using comparators
(Mechanical / Pneumatic/ Electrical)
9. Measurement of Temperature using Thermocouple / Pyrometer
10. Measurement of Displacement (Strain Gauge / LVDT / Wheatstone Bridge)
11. Measurement of Force
12. Measurement of Torque
185
13. Measurement of Vibration / Shock

14. Measurement of tool Wear
Mapping
CO1 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 1
Average Correlation
3 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 1
Level
186
19CHM31 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 NC
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To impart knowledge about the nature and facts of environment, the importance of ecosystem and
biodiversity, implement scientific solutions to environmental pollution, and to analyze social issues
and its impact on environment.
COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1: Develop knowledge on Environment and natural resources
CO2: Explain the nature of various eco systems and their conservation
CO3: Identify and implement technological and economical solution to environmental pollution
CO4: Analyze the impact of social issues on environment and implement strategies to achieve
sustainable development
CO5: Explain the impact of human population on environment
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL

9 hrs
RESOURCES
Definition, Scope and Importance – Need For Public Awareness. Forest Resources :- Use and Over
Exploitation, Deforestation, Timber Extraction, Mining, Dams and their effects on forest and tribal
people, Case Studies. Water Resources:- Over Utilization of Water, Ground Water, Floods,
Droughts, Conflicts Over Water, Dams – Benefits and problems – Case studies
Mineral Resources:- Use and Over Utilization of Surface and Exploitation of minerals,
Environmental Effects of Extracting and using Mineral Resources, Case Studies. Food Resources:-
World Food Problems, Changes caused by Agriculture and Overgrazing ,Effects of Modern
Agriculture, Fertilizer – Pesticide Problems, Water Logging, Salinity, Case Studies. Energy
Resources:-Growing Energy Needs, Renewable and Non Renewable Energy Sources, Use of
Alternative Energy Sources, Case Studies. Land Resources: - Land as a resource, Land Degradation,
Man Induced Land Slides, Soil Erosion and Deforestation –Role of an individual in Conservation of
Natural Resources – Equitable use of Resources for Sustainable Life styles. Field Study of Local
Area to document Environmental assets – Rivers / Forest / Grassland / Hill / Mountain.
187
UNIT 2: ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 9 hrs

Ecosystem - concept of an ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers,
consumers and decomposers – energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains,
food webs and ecological pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and
function of the (a) forest ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic
ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries) – Introduction to biodiversity definition:
genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – bio geographical classification of India – value of
biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values –
Biodiversity at global, national and local levels – India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of
biodiversity – threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts –
endangered and endemic species of India – conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ
conservation of biodiversity. Field study of common plants, insects, birds; Field study of simple
ecosystems – pond, river, hill slopes, etc.
UNIT 3: ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 9 hrs

Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid
waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of an
individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban, Rural, Industrial,
Agricultural.
UNIT 4: SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 9 hrs

From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water
conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation of
people; its problems and concerns, case studies – Role of non-governmental
organization- Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global warming,
acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. – wasteland
reclamation – consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air (Prevention and
Control of Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife protection act –
Forest conservation act – enforcement machinery involved in
environmental legislation- central and state pollution control boards- Public awareness.
188
UNIT 5: HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 9 hrs

Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare Programme –
environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and child
welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS
1. Benny Joseph, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2017.
2. Gilbert M.Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd edition,Pearson
Education, 2008.
3. Anubha and Kausik, ‘Environmental Science and Engineering’, 3rd Edition, New Age International
Publishers, New Delhi, 2014.
REFERENCES
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, ‘Environmental law’, Prentice hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.
2. ErachBharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press (I) Pvt Ltd, Hydrabad,
2015.
3. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spool man, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning India PVT
LTD, Delhi, 2014.
4. Rajagopalan, R, ‘Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure’, Oxford University Press, 2011.
5. Wright and Nebel, ‘Environmental Science towards a sustainable’, future, Prentice Hall of India
Ltd, 2004.
6. S.K. Garg and Garg, ‘Ecological and Environmental studies’, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2015.
7. Gilbert M. Masters, ‘Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science’, 2nd Edition,
Pearson education publication, Delhi,2008.
189
VIII SEMESTER
190
19MEZ81 PROJECT WORK

L T P C
0 0 20 10
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide a platform for the students to identify and provide technically feasible solution for
engineering problems utilizing the knowledge and skill acquired by the students from the engineering
program.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the student will able to,
CO1: Identify the problem pertaining to mechanical engineering domain
CO2: Apply the engineering fundamentals to select technically and economically feasible solution for
the identified Problem.
CO3: Device appropriate methodology to realize the solution
CO4: Execute task as a team
CO5: Prepare and present technical reports
The students may be grouped (not more than four) and work on a topic under a project supervisor
assigned by the head of the department and prepares a comprehensive project report after completing
the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is evaluated by a committee
constituted by the Head of the Department based on a minimum of three reviews. Final evaluation of
the project work is based on oral presentation and the project report by panel of examiners.

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 2
CO5 3 2 3 3 1 3 2
Average Correlation
3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 1 3 3 2
Level
191
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES
DESIGN
192
19MEE01 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To explain the basics of computer graphics, transformation and projections of geometric
models.
2. To use mathematical representation of curves and surfaces.
3. To know about solid modeling and to use graphics concept and relevant standards.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the student will be able to
CO1: Explain the coordinate system for the development of geometric models.
CO2: Develop the curves and surfaces using parametric equations.
CO3: Develop the solid models using different modeling approaches.
CO4: Apply graphics programming techniques to design and create computer graphics
CO5: Apply communication standards for CAD/CAM integration.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: GEOMETRIC TRANSFORMATIONS 9 hrs

Introduction to CAD – Definition, History and Benefits of Computer Aided Design – CAD/CAM
Systems: Systems Configuration & Components Graphics terminal, I/O devices, CPU – Co-ordinate
systems – Transformations: 2D and 3D Rotations, quaternions and rotation matrices –Scaling, Shear
and Translation, Homogeneous coordinates – Orthographic and Perspective projections.
UNIT 2: LINES. CURVES AND SURFACE MODELLING 9 hrs

Line and Circle Algorithm, Differential geometry of curves and surfaces – Parametric curves: Bezier
and B-splines and NURBS and their properties – Parametric surfaces: Tensor product surfaces,
Coon’s patches, Surfaces of Revolution, Sweep surfaces, Developable surfaces – Applications:
Modeling parts in CAD/CAM, representation of data surfaces like isothermal planes, stress
surfaces/contours.
193
UNIT 3: SOLID MODELLING 9 hrs

Geometry and topology – solid entities, solid representation, fundamental of solid modeling – half
spaces – boundary representation – constructive solid geometry – sweeps – solid manipulations –
Features: Feature entities, feature representation, three dimensional sketching, parametric, relations,
constraints – feature manipulation.
UNIT 4: GRAPHICS CONCEPT 9 hrs

Cohen Sutherland Clipping Algorithm – Hidden line removal, Visibility Techniques – Priority and
Area-oriented Algorithm – Hidden Surface removal, Z-Buffer and Warnock’s Algorithm – Coloring
and Shading – Optimization technique: Single variable optimization, multi-variable optimization,
Johnson’s method of optimum design – genetic algorithm.
UNIT 5: CAD STANDARDS 9 hrs

Standards for computer graphics- Graphical Kernel System (GKS) – standards for exchange images-
Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) – Data exchange standards – IGES, STEP, CALS etc. –
Communication standards.
Total Hours 45 hrs
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Zeid, I., “Mastering CAD/CAM”, Tata McGraw Hill,2007.
2. Onwubiko, C., “Foundation of Computer Aided Design”, West Publishing Company,1989
3. Hsu, T. R. and Sinha, D. K., “Computer Aided Design: An Integrated Approach”, West
Publishing Company,1991
4. Mortenson, M. E., “Geometric Modeling”, 3rd Ed., Industrial Press,2006
REFERENCES:
1. David,, Rogers and alan Adams, “Mathematical elements of Computer Graphics”, Mc-
Grawhill,2017.
2. M. E. Mortenson, “Mathematics for Computer Graphics Applications”, Industrial Press,
Inc.;1999
3. David Solomon, “Computer Graphics and Geometric Modeling”, Springer Series, 2013.
194
4. M. Mantyla, “Introduction to Solid Modeling”, W H Freeman & Co, 1988.

5. P.Radhakrishnan, S.Subramanyan, V.Raju, “CAD/CAM/CIM” New Age International,2008
Mapping PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PSO2 PSO3
0 1 2 1
CO1 3 3 1 - 2 - - - - 1 - 2 2 2 -
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 - 2 - - - - 1 - 2 2 2 -
CO3 3 3 2 - 3 - - - - 1 - 2 2 2 -
CO4 3 1 2 - 3 - - - - 1 - 2 2 2 -
CO5 3 1 1 - 2 - - - - 1 - 2 2 2 -
Average
3 2 2 - 2 - - - - 1 - 2 2 2 -
Correlation Level
195
19MEE02 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce and impart knowledge about the need, role, components and application of fluid power
systems and their control
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the components of fluid power systems and working of positive displacement pumps
CO2: Explain the construction and working of hydraulic actuators and control components
CO3: Design hydraulic circuits
CO4 : Explain the functionality, types and working of pneumatic circuit components and fluidic
devices
CO5: Design fluid power circuits using electrical control components and PLC
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: FLUID POWER FUNDEMENTALS AND PUMPS 9 hrs
Introduction to Fluid power - Advantages and Applications - Fluid power systems – Types of fluids-
Properties of fluids - Pascal’s Law - Principles of flow – Work, Power and Torque. Properties of air –
Perfect Gas Laws. Sources of Hydraulic power: Pumping Theory – Pump Classification -
Construction, Working, Design, Advantages, Disadvantages, Performance, Selection criterion of
Linear, Rotary- Fixed and Variable displacement pumps,
UNIT 2: HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS AND CONTROL COMPONENTS 9 hrs

Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Hydraulic motors Control Components:
Direction control, Flow control and Pressure control valves - Types, Construction and Operation -
Applications – Types of actuation. Accessories: Reservoirs, Accumulators, Intensifiers, Pressure
Switches - Applications - Fluid Power ANSI Symbol.
UNIT 3: HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS 9 hrs

Hydraulic circuits - Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double-pump, Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil,
196
Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-safe, Speed control, Hydrostatic transmission,

circuits using Accumulators, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical Hydraulic servo systems
UNIT 4: PNEUMATIC SYSTEM 9 hrs

Components of pneumatic system – Compressors - Filter, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air control
Valves, Quick Exhaust valves, Pneumatic actuators, Servo systems. Introduction to Fluidics,
Pneumatic logic circuits. Sequential circuit design for simple application using cascade method
UNIT 5: ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC CONTROL OF FLUID POWER

9 hrs
CIRCUITS
Electrical control components - Ladder Diagram - Electrical control of hydraulic and pneumatic
system – Low cost Automation - PLC - Applications in Hydraulic and Pneumatics – Maintenance and
Troubleshooting of Fluid Power circuits
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anthon Esopsito,, “Fluid Power with Applications”, Pearson Education, 6th edition, 2013.
2. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik,”Mechatronics-Principles, Concepts and Applications,
TataMcGraw Hill, 1st Edition, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1) Majumdar, S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems - Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill,
20017.
2) Majumdar, S.R., “Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill,
2017.
3) AndrewParr A. A., “Hydraulics and Pneumatics”, Elsevier, 1999
4) Micheal J, Pinches and Ashby, J.G., “Power Hydraulics”, Prentice Hall, 1989
5) Dudely, A Pease and John J Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987
6) Srinivasan.R, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic Controls” 2nd Edition Vijay Nicole Imprints, 2008
Mapping PSO PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
1 2 3
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 1
Average
3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 1
Correlation Level
197
19MEE03 DESIGN OF PRESSURE VESSELS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the components of pressure vessels and to design a pressure vessel by applying the
codes and standards
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Describe the basics of pressure vessel.
CO2 : Identify various stresses induced in pressure vessels.
CO3 : Design shells, end closures and nozzles of pressure vessels using ASME codes.
CO4 : Design suitable supports for pressure vessel.
CO5 : Perform failure analysis of pressure vessels
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION 6 hrs.

Overview of pressure vessel, development of pressure vessel construction codes, pressure vessel
design philosophy- general overview, structure and material considerations, factor of safety, design
by rule, design by analysis. Methods for determining stresses – Terminology and Ligament
Efficiency – Applications.
UNIT 2:STRESSES IN PRESSURE VESSELS 12 hrs.

Introduction to stresses in pressure vessel and its application to shells and end closures - stresses in
circular plate - Thermal stresses - Stresses in plate having the circular hole due to bi-axial loading,
excessive elastic deformation, plastic instability, brittle, rupture and creep.
UNIT 3: PRESSURE VESSEL DESIGN CODE 9 hrs.

Introduction to ASME code for pressure vessel design - Pressure vessel and related components
design using ASME codes - Design of nozzle
198
UNIT 4: DESIGN OF SUPPORTS 9 hrs.

Design of base plate and support lugs - Types of anchor bolt, its material and allowable stresses -
Design of saddle supports.
UNIT 5: FAILURE ANALYSIS OF VESSELS 9 hrs

Buckling phenomenon - Elastic Buckling of circular ring and cylinders under external pressure -
Collapse of thick walled cylinders or tubes under external pressure - Effect of supports on Elastic
Buckling of Cylinders - Buckling under combined External pressure and axial loading.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harvey, John F. , ‘Theory and Design of Pressure Vessels’ , CBS Publishers & Distributors,
Daryaganj, New Delhi (India), 2001
2. Brownell. L. E & Young. E. H, ‘Process equipment design’, Wiley Eastern Ltd., India, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Maan,H.Jawad ASME Pressure Vessel and Boiler code, Section VIII Div 1 & 2, 2017
American standard code for pressure piping, B 31.1.
2. Henry M Bednar, “Pressure vessel Design Hand book”, CBS publishers and distributors,
1991.
3. Stanley M Wales, “Chemical Process equipment, selection and design”, Butterworths, series
in Chemical Engineering, 2016..

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
Average
3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
Correlation Level
199
19MEE04 DESIGN OF PRODUCTION TOOLING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about production tooling and design jig, fixtures and press tools for various
mechanical operations.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Apply the design procedure to design production tools.
CO2 : Design of single and multipoint cutting tools.
CO3 : Design of fixtures and their components .
CO4 : Design of jigs for drilling operation.
CO5 : Design the die and punch for sheet metal operations.
COURSE CONTENT:

Tool design methods- Design procedure- drafting and design techniques in tool drawing- Tool
making practices- Jig-boring practice- Electrodischarge machining- low melting tooling materials-
punch and die manufacture.
UNIT 2: DESIGN OF CUTTING TOOLS 9 hrs.

Tool materials, design of single point cutting tool, form tool, drill, reamer, broach & plain milling
cutter.– design of tool holders for single point tools – Boring bars – selection of tools for machining
applications – economics of machining
UNIT 3: DESIGN OF FIXTURES 9 hrs.

Standard work holding devices – principles of location and clamping – clamping methods and
elements – quick-acting clamps – design & sketching of milling fixtures for simple components –
200
Turning, Grinding, Welding fixtures. inspection fixtures and design of gauges
UNIT 4: DESIGN OF DRILL JIGS 9 hrs.

Drill bushings – types of jigs: Plate, Leaf, Turn over & Box Jigs – design & sketching of drill jigs for
machining simple components
UNIT 5: PRESS TOOLS 9 hrs

Power presses – die cutting operations – center of pressure – scrap strip lay out for blanking – press
tonnage calculations – Progressive & Compound dies – die design for simple components. Drawing
dies – blank development – estimation of drawing force – blank holders & blank holding pressure –
design & sketching of drawing dies for simple components – Bending dies & Combination tools.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cyril Donaldson, Lecain and Goold: “Tool Design” – Tata Mc Graw Hill publications 2012.
2. A Bhattacharya; “Metal Cutting – Theory and Practice” – Central Book Agency Kolkata 2012.
REFERENCES:
1.John nee,”Fundamentals of Tool Design” Prentice Hall 2010.
2. F W Wilson “Hand Book of Fixture Design” - Mc Graw Hill publications,1962.
3. P.C .Sharma “A textbook of production technology” Chand (S.) & Company Limited,2010.
4. Kempster, Maurice Henry Albert “Principles of jig and tool design”1968.

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
Average
3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
Correlation Level
201
19MEE05 MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about fundamental concepts of vibration, types, measurement and analysis.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Develop the mathematical models of vibrating system.
CO2 : Analyze the mechanical system with two degrees of freedom.
CO3 : Analyze the mechanical system with Multi degrees of freedom.
CO4 : Analyze the vibration of continuous system.
CO5 : Describe the techniques of vibration measurement.
COURSE CONTENT:

Relevance of and need for vibrational analysis - Mathematical modelling of vibrating systems -
Discretes and continuous systems - review of single-degree of freedom systems - free and forced
vibrations, Various damping models.
UNIT 2: TWO DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEMS 12 hrs.

General solution to free vibration problem - damped free vibration - Forced vibration of undamped
system - dynamic vibration absorbers - Technical applications.
UNIT 3: MULTI DEGREE-OF-FREEDOM SYSTEMS 9 hrs.

Free and forced vibrations of multi-degree of freedom systems in longitudinal, torsional and lateral
modes - Matrix methods of solution-normal modes - Orthogonality principle-Energy methods,
Introduction to vibrations of plates.
202
UNIT 4: VIBRATION OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS 9 hrs.

Systems governed by wave equations – Vibration of strings – vibration of rods – Euler Equation for
Beams – Effect of Rotary inertia and shear deformation – Vibration of plates.
UNIT 5: VIBRATION MEASUREMENT 9 hrs

Vibration monitoring - data acquisition - Vibration Parameter Selection-Vibration sensors -
Accelerometers- Performance characteristics -Sensor location -Signal preamplification-Types of
preamplifiers-Instrumentation-Tape recorders-Real time analysis-Digital Fourier transforms-FFT
Analysis- Signature analysis and preventive maintenance: Vibration meters-vibration signatures-
standards-vibration testing equipment-in-site balancing of rotors.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Singiresu S.Rao - “Mechanical Vibrations”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2010 2. Grover.
G.T., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Nem Chand and Bros., 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. P.Srinivasan, " Mechanical Vibration Analysis ", Tata-Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 1996.
2. G.K.Grover, " Mechanical Vibrations ", New Chand and Bros., Roorkey, 2018..
3. William Seto, " Mechanical Vibrations ", Schaum Series, McGraw Hill Book Co.,
4. J.P.Den Hartog, " Mechanical Vibrations ", (4th Edition) McGraw Hill, New York, 2011.
5. L.Meirovitch, " Elements of vibration Analysis ", 2nd Edition McGraw Hill, New York,
1986..

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
Average
3 3 3 2 1 2 3 2 1
Correlation Level
203
19MEE06 MICRO ELECTRO AND MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about the fundamentals of Micro Electro Mechanical Systems (MEMS),
materials used for MEMS, fabrication techniques and its application.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Describe the typical materials used for MEMS.
CO2 : Explain the principles of standard micro fabrication techniques
CO3 : Explain the various sensors and actuators used in MEMS.
CO4 : Explain the application of polymers used in MEMS and optical devices.
CO5 : Illustrate the applications of MEMS.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION 9hrs.
Introduction to MEMS and Microsystems; Materials and Substrates for MEMS; Sensors- Sensors
characterization and classifications; Micro actuators; Applications of MEMS, Micro Electro
Mechanical Systems - MEMS materials- structural and sacrificial materials, properties of silicon,
mechanical, electrical and thermal properties of materials; Basic modeling of elements in electrical
and mechanical systems
UNIT 2: MICROMACHINING TECHNIQUES 9 hrs.

Microfabrication and Micromachining-Integrated Circuit Processes, Surface and Bulk
Micromachining; Isotropic Etching and Anisotropic Etching; Wafer Bonding; High Aspect-Ratio
Processes (LIGA) – Microstereolithography.-Assembly of 3D MEMS – Foundry process.
UNIT 3: SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9 hrs.

Mechanical sensor and actuation: Principle, Beam and Cantilever, Microplates, Capacitive effects,
Piezoelectric Materials as sensing and actuating elements, Strain Measurement, Pressure
measurement, Thermal sensor and actuation, Micro-Optoelectronic mechanical systems (MOEMS),
Radio Frequency (RF) MEMS, Bio-MEMS.
204
UNIT 4: POLYMER AND OPTICAL MEMS 9 hrs.

Polymers in MEMS- Polimide – SU-8 – Liquid Crystal Polymer (LCP) – PDMS – PMMA – Parylene
– Fluorocarbon – Application to Acceleration, Pressure, Flow and Tactile sensors- Optical MEMS -
Lenses and Mirrors – Actuators for Active Optical MEMS.
UNIT 5: MEMS APPLICATIONS 9hrs

Pressure Sensor, Accelerometer, Gyroscope, Digital Micromirror Devices (DMD), Optical switching,
Capacitive Micromachined Ultrasonic Transducers (CMUT) - MEMS Product development:
Performance, Accuracy, Repeatability, Reliability, Managing cost, Market uncertainties, Investment
and competition
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stephen D. Senturia, "Microsystem Design" by, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2005.
2. Chang Liu, “Foundations of MEMS”, Pearson 2012
3. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture”, TMH, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Nadim Maluf,“ An Introduction to Micro Electro Mechanical System Design”, Artech House,
2004.
2. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “ The MEMS Handbook”, CRC press Baco Raton, 2005.
3. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay K. Varadan, Osama O. Awadelkarim, "Micro Sensors MEMS and
Smart Devices", John Wiley & Son LTD,2013..
4. James J.Allen, "Micro Electro Mechanical System Design", CRC Press Publisher, 2010.
5. Thomas M.Adams and Richard A.Layton, “Introduction MEMS, Fabrication and Application,”
Springer 2012.
Mapping
CO1 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
Average
3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
Correlation Level
205
19MEE07 PLASTICS ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about plastic materials, their applications and manufacturing techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the types of plastic materials.
CO2: Describe the processing techniques of plastics.
CO3: Explain methods of injection moulding.
CO4: Discuss the extrusion manufacturing process.
CO5: Elaborate on safety measures and advanced processing techniques.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: PLASTIC MATERIALS 9 hrs
Type of Plastic materials, Thermo Plastic and Thermoset Plastics, Material Property and Material
Selection criteria - Engineering Plastic: Sources of Raw Materials – Method of Manufacture – General
Characteristics & Properties- Processing Behaviour and applications of Engineering Plastics
Polyoxymethylene, Polyamide (PA6, PA66, PA610, PA11, PA12 and PA46), Polyesters (PET, PBT),
Poly Carbonate , Polyphenylene Oxide, UHMWHDPE, Polytetrafluoroethylene, Polyvinyl fluoride,
Polyvinylidene fluoride, Thermoplastics Polyurethane
UNIT 2: PROCESSING OF PLASTIC 9 hrs

Basic Principles of Melt Processing of Thermoplastics – Effect of Polymer Properties on Processing -
Thermal Behavior of Polymer Melt - Rheology of Ideal Fluids and Polymers – Newtonian & Non-
Newtonian fluids - Processing of Thermoset Plastics - Different Types of Processes - Description and
Limitation - Processing Flow Chart - Selecting a Process – Degradation - Orientation – Process
Advantage of Plastics over Conventional Materials.
206
UNIT 3: INJECTION MOULDING 9 hrs

Basic Process Principle - Machine rating and Specification - Types of Machines –
Injection Process: Construction - Parts and its functions - Start-up and shut down procedure –
Operation procedure - Clamping system - Type of Screw and its function - Heating System - Ejection
system – Back Pressure - Suck back - Drooling - Nozzle Type - Process variables - Moulding
cycle - Purging - Material recommendation - Microprocessor controlled Injection Moulding
Machine- Shrinkage – Annealing - Dimensional Control - Moulding Record - Trouble
Shooting - Injection Moulding of Thermosetting Materials – Automation - Introduction to
Troubleshooting - Types of Injection Moulds - Two Plate Mould - Three Plate Mould - Cavity
& Core finishing – Gate Types - Runner – Hot Runner Mould –Insulated Runner Mould
system.
UNIT 4:EXTRUSION 9 hrs

Introduction - principles - classification of extruders - single screw extruder - specification - screw
nomenclature - types of screws - L/D ratio, compression ratio-back pressure – factors governing back
pressure - output and factors affecting output-heating & cooling systems - breaker plate - screen pack
& its functions - screw & hopper cooling-die entry effects and die exit instabilities - shark skin, melt
fracture & bambooing. Twin screw extruder - principle - types - process - merits & demerits - Vented
barrel extruder - hopper loading devices - Drying equipments - Process, machinery – downstream
equipments - dies for producing products such as - film - blow film, cast film - Sheets – Tubes and
pipes, corrugated pipes - Mono filaments - Box strapping - Wire & Cable Coating / Lamination.
UNIT 5: SAFETY AND ADVANCED TECHNIQUES 9 hrs

Safety: Mechanical/Electrical safety measures, Mould Loading and Clamping Techniques. Heating
Element, Sensors, Safety Door Safety Limit
Advanced Technology: Advance Injection process Mucell Injection, Gas Injection and In-mould
labeling
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allen; W. S. and Baker; P. N., “Hand Book of Plastic Technology, Volume-1, Plastic
Processing Operations [Injection, Compression, Transfer, Blow Molding]”, CBS Publishers
and Distributors, New Delhi (2004).
2. Injection Molding Hand Book By Rusto,D.V&Rosato, “Plastic Engineering Hand Book”
Society of Plastic Industry Inc.,2001..
207
3. I Rubin, Irvin, “Injection Moulding Theory & Practice” – John Wiley & Sons New York, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. J.A. Brydson “Plastics Materials” Butterworth-Heinemann Publishers-1999
2. A.S. Athalye ,”Plastic Materials Hand Book”- Multi-Tech Pub. Co- 2009.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 3 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 3 2 1
Average
3 3 1 1 1 3 2 1
Correlation Level
208
19MEE08 DESIGN OF ELECTRIC VEHICLES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire knowledge on needs of electric and hybrid vehicle, their architecture, energy storage
elements, control unit and charging stations
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the basics of electric and hybrid vehicle, policies and regulations pertaining to
commercial usage
CO2: Explain the architecture of different types of electric and hybrid vehicles.
CO3: Select suitable drives and controllers for electric vehicles.
CO4: Explain about the energy storage systems for electric vehicles.
CO5: Select and size charging station for electric vehicle.
COURSE CONTENT:

History of electric and hybrid vehicles. Need of electric and hybrid vehicles - Components of Electric
Vehicle - Comparison with Internal combustion Engine: Benefits and Challenges - EV classification
and their electrification levels - EV Terminology. Comparison of Connected and autonomous
vehicles. Technology Scenario - Market Scenario - Policies and Regulations - Payback and
commercial model - Polices in India.
UNIT 2: ARCHITECTURE OF ELECTRIC VEHICLE 9 hrs

Types of Electric Vehicle and components- Electrical protection and system requirement – PV solar
based EV design - Battery Electric vehicle (BEV)- Hybrid electric vehicle (HEV), Plug-in hybrid
vehicle (PHEV), Fuel cell electric vehicle (FCEV) -Electrification Level of EV - Solar Power
operated Electric vehicles, Comparison of fuel vs Electric and solar power.
209
UNIT 3: ELECTRIC DRIVE – CONTROLLERS 9 hrs

Calculating the rolling resistance, grade resistance, acceleration force, total tractive effort and torque
for drive wheel - Electric Drive and controller -Types of Motors - Selection and sizing of Motor -
RPM and Torque calculation of motor - Motor Controllers - Component sizing - Physical locations -
Mechanical connection of motor - Electrical connection of motor.
UNIT 4: ENERGY STORAGE SOLUTIONS 9 hrs

Energy Storage Solutions (ESS)- Cell Types (Lead Acid/Li/NiMH) - Battery charging and
discharging calculation - Cell Selection and sizing- Battery lay outing design- Battery Pack
Configuration- Battery Pack Construction - Battery selection criteria- Battery Management
System(BMS) / Energy Management System (EMS)- Need of BMS - Rule based control and
optimization based control - Software-based high level supervisory control- Mode of power -
Behavior of motor - Advance Features.
UNIT 5: CONTROL UNIT & CHARGING STATION 9 hrs

Control Unit - Function of CU - Development Process – Software – Hardware - Data Management -
GUI/HMI - Electric Vehicles charging station - Type of Charging station - Selection and Sizing of
charging station - Components of charging station - Single line diagram of charging station.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained” John Wiley &
Sons,2012.
2. Husain, I. “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles”, CRC Press, 2010.
3. Mehrdad Ehsani, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”,3rd Edition CRC
Press,2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication, 2005.
2. Lino Guzzella, “Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2015..
3. Ali Emadi, Mehrdad Ehsani, John M. Miller, “Vehicular Electric Power Systems” Boca
Raton, CRC Press, 2003.
210
4.Larminie, James, and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained” John Wiley and
Sons, 2012.
5.Tariq Muneer and Irene Illescas García, “The automobile, In Electric Vehicles: Prospects and
Challenges”, Elsevier, 2017.
6.Williamson, Sheldon S, “Energy Management Strategies for Electric and Plug-in Hybrid
Electric Vehicles”, Springer, 2013.
Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 3
Average
3 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
Correlation Level
211
19MEE09 ADVANCED STRENGTH OF MATERIALS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To know the advanced concepts of mechanics of materials under various loading conditions
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Carry out analysis of members within elastic limits
CO2: Locate shear centre and analyze beams subjected to unsymmetrical loading
CO3: Estimate stresses in various members
CO4: Analyze non symmetrical sections under torsional load
CO5: Determine stresses in rotating members and contact regions
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: ELASTICITY 9 hrs

Stress-Strain relations and general equations of elasticity in Cartesian, Polar and curvilinear
coordinates, differential equations of equilibrium-compatibility-boundary conditions-representation
of three-dimensional stress of a tension generalized hook's law - St. Venant's principle - plane stress -
Airy's stress function. Energy methods.
UNIT 2: SHEAR CENTRE AND UNSYMMETRICAL BENDING 9 hrs

Location of shear center for various thin sections - shear flows. Stresses and Deflections in beams
subjected to unsymmetrical loading-kern of a section.
UNIT 3: STRESSES IN FLAT PLATES AND CURVED MEMBERS 9 hrs

Circumference and radial stresses – deflections - curved beam with restrained ends - closed ring
subjected to concentrated load and uniform load - chain links and crane hooks. Solution of
rectangular plates – pure bending of plates – deflection – uniformly distributed load – various end
conditions
212
UNIT 4: TORSION OF NON CIRCULAR SECTIONS 9 hrs

Torsion of rectangular cross section - St.Venants theory - elastic membrane analogy - Prandtl's stress
function - torsional stress in hollow thin walled tubes.
UNIT 5: STRESSES IN ROTATING MEMBERS AND CONTACT STRESSES 9 hrs

Radial and tangential stresses in solid disc and ring of uniform thickness and varying thickness
allowable speeds. Methods of computing contact stress-deflection of bodies in point and line contact
applications.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Arthur P Boresi, Richard J. Schmidt, “Advanced mechanics of materials", John Wiley, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen Timoshenko and Goodier, "Theory of Elasticity", McGraw Hill.2017.
2. Robert D. Cook, Warren C. Young, "Advanced Mechanics of Materials", Mc- millan pub.
Co., 1998..
3. Srinath. L.S., “Advanced Mechanics of solids”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
4. G H Ryder Strength of Materials Macmillan, India Ltd, 2013.
5. Allan F. Bower, “Applied Mechanics of Solids”, CRC press – 5th Edition -2012

Mapping
CO1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2
Average
3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2
Correlation Level
213
19MEE10 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basic concepts of finite element analysis, and its application such as heat transfer,
structural and dynamics cases.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the evolution of FEA from various approximate methods.
CO2: Apply finite element formulations to solve 1D & 2D heat transfer problems
CO3: Solve the structural problem of 1D & 2D using finite element methods
CO4: Solve dynamics problems using finite element method
CO5: Identify the use of Iso-parametric element and application of numerical integration
COURSE CONTENT:
Numerical solution versus analytical solution- Basic steps in FEA- Preprocessing and Post processing
- Problem Classification, Modeling and Discretization-Interpolation, Elements, Nodes and Degrees of
Freedom- Shape functions - Global, Local and Natural coordinate systems in FEA- Area coordinate
system- Classification of Elements-Linear and Higher order Elements-Compatibility and
Convergence rate of Elements-Formulation Techniques of Element Matrices-Variational and
Weighed Residual Methods of Formulation- Galerkin Method
UNIT 2: HEAT TRANSFER PROBLEMS 9 hrs

One dimensional governing differential equation of heat transfer through composite walls and fins-
Development of Element matrices by Galerkin Method- Solution of 1D and 2D heat transfer
problems
214
UNIT 3: STRUCTURAL PROBLEMS 9 hrs

Development of Element matrices for axial load member, beam and plane truss- Temperature effect -
Solution of problems involving axial load member, beams and plane trusses- Development of
Element matrices for triangular element - Plane stress and Plane strain conditions- Axisymmetric
element -Solution of problems involving triangular elements- Computation of element stresses and
strains.
UNIT 4: STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS PROBLEMS 9 hrs

Formulation of Element matrices - Lumped and Consistent methods - Determination of mass matrix
for 1D element - evaluation of Eigen values and Eigen vectors - Mode shapes- Natural frequencies
UNIT 5: ISOPARAMETRIC ELEMENTS 9 hrs

Classification and uses of higher order elements - Serendipity elements -1D and 2D Shape functions
of bar, triangular and rectangular elements- -Jacobian transformation -Numerical Integration
Techniques- Solution of problems using Numerical Integration Techniques
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cook R.D, Malkus.D.S, Plesha. M.E, “Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis”,
John-Wiley Sons, 2011.
2. Tirupathi R.Chandrupatla and Ashok D.Belegundu, “Introduction to Finite Elements in
Engineering”, Pearson Higher Ed USA,2011.
REFERENCES:
1. J.N.Reddy, “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method” Tata McGraw Hill, 2018.
2. Rao.S.S., “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Elsevier Butterworth Heinemann, 2017.
3. Daryl L. Logan,“A First Course in the Finite Element Method: 2nd Edition”, Cengage Learning,
2014.

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Average
3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 1
Correlation Level
215
19MEE11 DESIGN OF PIPING SYSTEMS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the design procedure of piping system and to design piping layout for industrial
applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the standards, codes and elements of piping system.
CO2: Design components for piping system
CO3: Develop piping layout for industrial application.
CO4: Select suitable supports for piping system
CO5: Analyze the stresses on piping system.
COURSE CONTENT:
(Use of relevant piping design code and data book is permitted)

Introduction of piping systems-Codes & standards for piping engineering & design-Piping elements-
Types of valves- Testing of valves-Piping drawing layout and instruments diagram- Static and
dynamic loading systems- Equipment layout basic of flow through pipes
UNIT 2: DESIGN OF PIPING SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9 hrs

Concept used in developing an initial piping layout- Design principles including fluid properties,
flow rate, and physical laws which influence the complete piping system layout- effect of different
piping system components such as tanks, vessels, valves and pumps on the overall configuration.
UNIT 3: DESIGN OF TOTAL PIPING SYSTEM 9 hrs

Different types of equipment and piping systems- Differences between series piping, parallel piping
216
and branch piping - applications – static and dynamic head loss- selection and distribution of piping
components throughout the entire system.
UNIT 4: INFLUENCE OF SUPPORTS ON PIPING DESIGN 9 hrs

Rigid pipe supports: Factors of the piping stress analysis and impact on the overall support design
and feasibility- Spring supports: Variable, constant and big ton springs- Modification of standard
spring elements- Restraints: Hydraulic snubbers- Mechanical snubbers and sway struts
UNIT 5 : PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS 9 hrs

Flow diagram - piping layout and piping stress analysis - Flexibility factor and stress intensification
factor - Design of piping system as per piping code - Piping components - bends, tees, bellows and
valves - Types of piping supports and their behaviour.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter smith, “The fundamentals of piping design”- Ist edition- Gulf publishing company 2007.
2. Sahu G.K., “Hand Book of Piping Design”, New Age International (P) Ltd. 2008..
REFERENCES:
1. M.W, Kellogg, “Design of Piping systems” Tata McGraw Hill 2009.
2. Sam Kannappan, “Introduction to Pipe Stress Analysis”, New Age International (P) Ltd.. 2008.

Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 1
Average
3 3 3 3 1 1 1 3 3 1
Correlation Level
217
19MEE12 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge of designing and developing the product as per the requirement of end user.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Elaborate the concept of product design and development process.
CO2 : Establish the product specification based on customer requirements.
CO3 : Generate and select concepts for product design.
CO4 : Establish product architecture giving emphasis to industrial design.
CO5 : Implement the concepts of embodiment design.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROJECT

9 hrs
SELECTION
Significance of product design, product design and development process, sequential engineering design
method, the challenges of product development, Identifying opportunities evaluate and prioritize projects,
allocation of resources
UNIT 2: - IDENTIFYING CUSTOMER NEEDS AND PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 9 hrs.

Interpret raw data in terms of customers need, organize needs in hierarchy and establish the relative
importance of needs., Establish target specifications, setting final specifications
UNIT 3: - CONCEPT GENERATION AND CONCEPT SELECTION 9 hrs.

Activities of concept generation, clarifying problem, search both internally and externally, explore the
output, Concept selection - overview, concept screening and concept scoring, methods of selection.
218
UNIT 4: PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE AND INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9 hrs.

Product Architecture-Modular and Integral architecture, implications, establishing the architecture, Delayed
differentiation, Platform Planning. Industrial Design - Assessing need for industrial design, impact of
industrial design, industrial design process, management, assessing quality of industrial design.
UNIT 5:DFM AND PRODUCT DEVLOPMENT 9hrs

Design for manufacturing - definition, estimation of manufacturing cost, reducing the cost of components,
assembly, supporting production, impact of DFM on other factors. Intellectual property - elements and
outline, patenting procedures, claim procedure, Design for Environment: Impact, regulations from
government, ISO system and IPR.
Total Hours 45
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Eppinger S.D and Anita Goyal, “Product Design and Development”, Ulrich K. T, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2011.
2. Otto K, and Wood K “Product Design”, Pearson Education, 2001.
3. David G. Ullman, “The Mechanical Design Process”, McGraw-Hill Inc., Singapore, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Stephen Rosenthal / Business One Orwin, Homewood “Effective Product Design and
Development”, 1992.
2. Kemnneth Crow, “Concurrent Engg/ integrated Product development” Workshop Book, 2011.
3. Staurt Pugh,”Tool Design – Integrated Methods for Successful Product Engineering”Addison
Wesley Publishing, New york 2017.
Mapping
CO1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
CO5 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 2
Average
2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
Correlation Level
219
19MEE13 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about the functional components of automobile and emission control.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Illustrate the vehicle structure and the associated safety standards.
CO2: Explain different types of fuel management systems for automobiles
CO3: Describe types of transmission system for automobiles.
CO4: Elaborate steering, suspension and braking system.
CO5: Discuss about the electrical, safety system and emission control for automobiles.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND STANDARDS 9 hrs

An overview of different types of automobiles and their power sources - Vehicle Structure and Engines -
Vehicle Construction - Chassis, Frame and Body - Aerodynamics - Components of Engine - their forms,
functions and materials – Octane, Cetane Rating – Engine layouts - Performance Parameters - Indian Safety
standards.
UNIT 2: FUEL MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 9 hrs

Reciprocating Engine systems, Hybrid systems – Carburetors - Electronic fuel injection system – GDI -
CRDI - Naturally aspirated, Supercharged and Turbocharged engines – overhead valve (OHV), single
overhead camshaft (SOHC), double overhead camshaft (DOHC) – Valve timing – Actuators – variable
valve timing (VVT) – variable valve actuation (VVA) - Electronic Engine Management System - Liquid
and gaseous alternate fuels - Alcohol, LPG, CNG, and Hydrogen – Fuel additives - Catalytic converter
systems.
220
UNIT 3: POWER TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9 hrs

Clutch – Types and construction - Slipper clutch - Gear boxes: Manual, Automatic, automated manual
transmission (AMT), continuously variable transmission (CVT), dual clutch transmission (DCT) –
Torque converters – Propeller shaft – Slip joint – Universal joints – Differential – Axles- front wheel
drive (FWD), rear wheel drive (RWD), all-wheel drive (AWD)
UNIT 4: STEERING, SUSPENSION AND BRAKES 9 hrs

Wheels and tyres – Wheel alignment parameters – Steering system - working, types and steering
geometry parameters – Power steering – Suspension systems – Damping – Camber control – Braking
systems – Diagonal braking system – Antilock braking system – Brake Assist system – Traction
Control - Electronically Controlled Active Suspension System - Wheel balancing & Alignment - Wind
Tunnel testing
UNIT 5: ELECTRICAL, SAFETY SYSTEMS AND POLLUTION CONTROL 9 hrs

Introduction to Battery, Alternator, and Starter Motor systems - working principle and circuitry, Sensors-
Speed, Mass air flow, Coolant, Fuel temperature and Oxygen sensor. Safety systems - seat belts, air-bag,
tyre pressure monitoring, Electronic stability program, Electronic brake force distribution, automatic
headlamp ON, rain sensing wipers, speed sensing, auto locking. Emission norms (BS and Euro) - Pollutants
and emissions check - Exhaust gas recirculation - Selective Catalytic reduction (SCR)
Note: Practical training in dismantling and assembling of engine parts and transmission system should
be given to the students.
Total Hours 45
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Sethi, H.M., “Automobile Technology”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006..
2. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering Vol. 1 and 2”, Standard Publishers, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1. Donald Crouse and Anglin “Automotive Mechanism”, 9 th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2017..
2. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “Motor vehicles”, Butterworth Publishers, 2001.
3. Srinivasan, S., “Automotive Mechanics”, 2 nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2017.
4. Bechtold, R.L., “Alternative Fuels Guidebook”, SAE, 1997
221
5. Gill P.S., “A Textbook of Automobile Engineering - Vol. I, II and III”, S. K. Kataria and Sons,
2nd Edition, 2013.
6. Giri, N.K., “Automotive Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 2 nd Edition, 2010.
7. Robert Bosch GmbH, “Automotive Handbook”, Robert Bosch, 2018.
8. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, 2 nd Edition, East-West Press, 2004.

Mapping
CO1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2
Average
2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1
Correlation Level
222
19MEE14 ADVANCED MODELING AND COMPUTATIONAL SKILL LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 6 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire knowledge and skill to create production drawings, solid and surface models using
advanced modeling software tools and use Computational tool to solve engineering problems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Create free form surface models, assembly and exploded drawing with bill of material
CO2: Apply dimensional tolerance on detailed drawings.
CO3: Analyze the motion of mechanisms using simulation software.
CO4: Solve the Linear and Nonlinear models of engineering systems using computational tools.
CO5: Develop the scripts for creation of curves, surfaces and solids.
COURSE CONTENT:
Topic covered under advanced modeling:
• Fundamentals of Solid Modeling and Free Form Surface Modeling
• Parametric modeling techniques to reflect engineering requirements.
• Advanced Detail Drawings, Geometric Dimensioning & Tolerancing(GD&T)
• Fit Calculations & Tolerance Stacks
• Equation Driven Dimensions
• Design of Functional Layouts & Advance mates (Design of functional layouts using collision
detection
• Determination of Volume & Center of Mass
• Advanced Assembly Drawings & Part Driven Bill of Materials
• Motion Model Generation – Motion Analysis – Visualization using Pro/Mechanism Design
223
• Parametric and non-parametric representation of curves with example using ProE/Creo

Topic covered under Computational Skill
• Introduction to MATLAB
• Solving systems of Linear & Nonlinear equations with engineering applications.
• Solving Ordinary Differential equations in the mechanical applications like damped harmonic
oscillator, duffing oscillator etc.
• Writing scripts (Programs) using MATLAB for curves, surfaces and solids.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Roger Toogood,”Pro/Engineer Wildfire 5.0 Advanced Tutorial”, SDC Publications,2009
2. Brian R.Hunt, Ronald L.Lipsman, Jonathan M.Rosenberg,”A Guide to MATLAB for Beginners
and Experienced Users” Cambridge University Press,2014
REFERENCES:
1. Kuang-Hua Chang,”Mechanism Design with Creo Elements/Pro 5.0”, SDC Publications,2019.
2. Steven T.Karris,”Numerical Analysis using MATLAB and Spread sheets”, Orchard
Publications,2009.
Mapping
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 1 1 3 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 3 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1
Average
3 3 2 2 3 1 1 2 2 1
Correlation Level
224
225
MANUFACTURING
226
19MEE15 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
To impart knowledge to select and adapt best method of production of a product and to estimate cost
of production.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Measure and establish time standard for jobs.
CO2: Select the best sequence of processing of materials.
CO3: Estimate the cost of production.
CO4: Describe the cost estimation technique of different production shops.
CO5: Evaluate the machining cost for different machining process
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT 1: WORK STUDY AND ERGONOMICS 9 hrs

Method study – Definition – Objectives - Motion economy - Principles – Tools and Techniques
Applications – Work measurements- purpose – use – procedure – tools and techniques- Standard time
– Ergonomics – principles – applications.
UNIT 2: PROCESS PLANNING 9 hrs

Definition – Objective – Scope – approaches to process planning – process planning activities –
Finished part requirements – operating sequences – machine selection – material selection parameters
– Set of documents for process planning – Production time calculation – Selection of cost optimal
processes (Break even analysis) – Developing manufacturing logic and knowledge.
UNIT 3 INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 9 hrs

Objective of cost estimation- costing – cost accounting- classification of cost- Elements of cost.
Types of estimates – methods of estimates – data requirements and sources- collection of cost
227
allowances in estimation. Allocation of overhead expenses – Illustrative examples.
UNIT 4: ESTIMATION OF COSTS IN DIFFERENT SHOP 9 hrs

Estimation in foundry shop – Pattern cost - Casting cost - Estimation in forging shop – Losses in
forging – Forging cost. Estimation in welding shop – Gas cutting – Electric welding. Estimation
in sheet metal shop – Shearing and forming – Case studies for each shop
UNIT 5: COST ESTIMATION OF MACHINING OPERATIONS 9 hrs

Estimation of machining time for lathe operations - Estimation of machining time for drilling,
boring, shaping, planning, milling and grinding operations – Case Studies of Cost estimation for
different machining operations.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1) Peter Scallan, “Process planning, Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier science technology
Books, 2003.
REFERENCES:
1) Ostwald P.F. and Munez J., “Manufacturing Processes and systems”, 9th Edition, John Wiley,
2008.
2) Russell R.S and Taylor B.W, “Operations Management”, 4th Edition, PHI, 2010.
3) Chitale A.V. and Gupta R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2011.
4) Adithan.M.,”Process Planning and Cost estimation”, New Age International (P) Ltd.,2015.

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
Average
3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
Correlation Level
228
19MEE16 SMART MANUFACTURING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To introduce the smart connected systems using Internet of Things, Cloud in Industrial
Automation
2. To use devices in IoT Technology
3. To familiarize the concepts of designing and developing various service models (IaaS, Paas
and SaaS) and deployment models (Public, Private and Hybrid clouds).
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Apply the concept of Industry 4.0 and IoT to the solution of complex Engineering problems in
modern Industrial sector.
CO2: Select appropriate additive manufacturing method for particular industrial product.
CO3: Select suitable robot for the manufacturing industrial applications.
CO4: Design IoT Components that meet with realistic constraints for societal and environmental
considerations.
CO5: Apply the knowledge of virtualization techniques to various service models.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INDUSTRY 4.0 9 hrs

Introduction to Industrial revolutions - Industry 4.0 environment - Drivers of industry 4.0 - Digital
integration in smart factory - Cyber Physical System - Internet of Things and Services - New
technologies for future manufacturing - Benefits and Challenges of Industry 4.0
UNIT 2: ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9 hrs
Introduction to additive manufacturing – Classification of AM process – Generic AM process – SLS –
SLA – DMLS - Reverse Engineering – Computer Aided Engineering - Powder fusion mechanism –
Process parameter & Modeling – PBF commercial machine - Material Jetting – Guide line for process
selection- Applications of AM – Introduction to 3D & 4D printing
UNIT 3: ROBOTS IN MANUFACTURING 9 hrs
Introduction about robotics in automation - Robot classification – Robot coordination system -
Artificial Intelligence and Robotics - Robot applications in manufacturing – Material handling –
229
Processing Operations – Assembly and Inspection – Future Robot Technology and tasks – Social and
Labor Issues.
UNIT 4: INTERNET OF THINGS 9 hrs
Internet of Things Promises – Definition – Scope – Sensors for IoT Applications – Structure of IoT –
IoT Map Device - Technological Analysis - Wireless Sensor Structure – Energy Storage Module –
Power Management Module – RF Module – Sensing Module IoT Development Examples
UNIT 5: CLOUD SERVICES AND FILE SYSTEM 9 hrs
Cloud Computing Basics - Cloud Computing definition - Types of Cloud services - Software as a
Service (SaaS) - Platform as a Service (Paas) – Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) - Database as a
Service - Monitoring as a Service – Communication as a service - Service providers - Google App
Engine - AmazonEC2 - Microsoft Azure - Sales force.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alasdair Gilchrist,”Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”,Apress, Berkeley CA,
2017.
2. Bartodziej, Christoph Jan,”The Concept Industry 4.0 : An Empirical Analysis of Technologies
and Applications in Production Logistics”, 1st Edition, Springer Gabler, 2017.
3. RajkumarBuyya, Christian Vecchiola, ThamaraiSelvi S, “Mastering Cloud Computing”,Tata
McGraw Hill Education Private Limited,1st Edition, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1. Ian Gibson,David Rosen and Brent Stucker, “Additive Manufacturing Technologies” 3D
printing, Rapid prototyping and Direct Digital Manufacturing, Springer, 2015.
2. Nicholas Odrey, Mitchell Weiss, Mikell Groover, Roger N Nagel and Ashish Dutta,
“Industrial Robotics (SIE): Technology, Programming And Applications”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company, 2012.
3. Vijay Madisetti and Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on-Approach)”, 1st
Edition, 2014
Mapping
CO1 3 3 1 2 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3
Average
3 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 3
Correlation Level
230
19MEE17 WELDING AND CASTING PROCESS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To acquire knowledge about the principles and types of welding and casting processes
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, the students will able to
CO1: Describe the principles, types and applications of arc welding processes.
CO2: Demonstrate the power beam welding processes.
CO3: Explain the different pressure welding processes.
CO4: Comprehend the mechanism of solidification and types of casting process.
CO5: Describe about advanced metal casting processes.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: WELDING PROCESS 9 hrs

Introduction to welding, principles, classification, application, advantages and limitations of welding.
conventional fusion welding processes, principal heat sources, physics of welding arc, arc welding
processes - Metal arc welding, Flux shielded metal arc welding, Inert gas welding and Submerged arc
welding.
UNIT 2: POWER BEAM WELDING PROCESSES 9 hrs

Introduction to power beam welding processes: Plasma, Laser and Electron beam welding processes -
principles and modes of operation, applications and advantages. Principles of power beam welding
processes: keyhole formation, power densities, forces acting in keyhole, pressure balance for a
generalized keyhole, heat transfer in laser and electron beam welding processes.
UNIT 3: PRESSURE WELDING PROCESSES 9 hrs

Introduction to pressure welding processes - solid state bonding, friction welding, friction stir
231
welding, ultrasonic welding, explosive welding, diffusion bonding and adhesive bonding. Principles
and operational considerations of pressure welding processes.
UNIT 4: METAL CASTING PROCESSES 9 hrs

Introduction to casting, mechanism of solidification, solidification of pure metals and alloys, casting
processes – gravity die casting, pressure die casting, centrifugal casting, squeeze casting, slush
casting, thixocasting and continuous casting processes.
UNIT 5: ADVANCED METAL CASTING PROCESSES 9 hrs

Evaporative Pattern Casting process (EPC), processing Steps, requirements and variables in EPC,
Hybrid EPC (Vacuum assisted Evaporative Pattern Casting Process), Vacuum Sealed Moulding
Process (VSMP), set up and process parameters in VSMP, Investment Casting Process and Ceramic
shell investment casting Process.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.S Parmer ,” Welding Processes and Technology”, Khanna Publishers, 2003.
2. Robert W. Messler, Jr , “Principles of Welding”, Wiley – VCH,2004.
3. Heine, Loper and Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Casting”, McGraw Hill, 2017.
4. 4. A.K.Chakrabarti, “Casting Technology and Cast Alloys”, Prentice –Hall Of India Ltd,
2005.
REFERENCES:
1. P.N.Rao , “Manufacturing Technology” , Tata McGraw Hill, 2017..
2. John Norrish, “Advanced Welding Processes”, Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2006.
3. Flinn, “Fundamentals of Metal Casting”, Addison Wesley, 1963.
4. T.V.Rama Rao, “Metal casting Principles and Practice”, New Age International,2010.

Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
Average
3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
Correlation Level
232
19MEE18 LIGHT WEIGHT AND INDUSTRIAL COMPOSITES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To develop knowledge about the fundamentals, types, processing techniques and mechanics of light
weight and industrial composite materials so that suitable material can be selected for engineering
applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the need for lighter materials and their engineering applications.
CO2: Explain the characteristics and application of alloys and composites.
CO3: Select a suitable technique for the fabrication of polymer matrix composites.
CO4: Choose processing technique for fabricating metal matrix composites and nano composites for
various industrial applications.
CO5: Process the ceramics into useful composite materials
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: LIGHT WEIGHT MATERIALS-INTRODUCTION 9 hrs

Need, Introduction, Classifications and Characteristics of Metals and Alloys, polymers, ceramics and
composites. Properties of engineering materials, Selection of engineering materials, strengthening
mechanisms- solid solution strengthening, strengthening by grain size reduction, recrystallization and
grain growth, strain hardening and precipitation hardening, Application of light materials in - Aircraft,
Military, Space Applications, Automotive, Sporting Goods, Marine, Infrastructure.
UNIT 2: ALLOYS AND COMPOSITES 9 hrs

Effect of adding alloying elements, Properties and applications of Copper alloys – Brass, Bronze,
Aluminium alloys – Au-Cu, Nickel and Titanium alloys, Magnesium alloys, Carbon alloys, High
entropy alloys- Composites- Classification, Advantages and Applications- Rule of Mixture.
233
UNIT 3: POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES 9 hrs

Reinforcements -Types - Fibers– Glass fiber, Boron fiber, carbon fiber, organic fiber, Matrix materials–
Polymers, Classification of Polymers – Properties of Thermo and Thermosetting Plastics- Processing
of Polymer matrix composites - Hand layup, spray, filament winding, Pultrusion, resin transfer
moulding, autoclave moulding - Bag moulding, Compression moulding – Thermoplastic matrix
composites- Injection moulding - Applications.
UNIT 4: METAL MATRIX COMPOSITES 9 hrs

Metallic matrices: Aluminum, titanium, magnesium, copper alloys – Processing of MMCs: liquid state,
Solid state, in situ fabrication techniques – diffusion bonding – powder metallurgy techniques -
interfaces in MMCs – Mechanical properties and industrial application.
Nanocomposites: Processing of Metallic Nanocomposites – Mechanical properties and industrial
application.
UNIT 5: CERAMIC MATRIX COMPOSITES 9 hrs

Processing of CMC: cold pressing, sintering, reaction bonding, liquid infiltration, lanxide process – In
situ chemical reaction techniques: chemical vapour deposition, chemical vapour impregnation, sol-gel
method – Interfaces in CMCs – mechanical properties and applications of CMCs
Carbon-Carbon Composites: Carbon-carbon Composites – Carbon Fiber Reinforcements - Matrix
Systems -Processing of Carbon-Carbon Composites -Properties and applications.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Balasubramanian M,”Composite materials and processing”, CRC Press, Boca Raton, USA, 2013
2. Krishan K. Chawla ., “Composite materials- Science and Engineering”, Fourth Edition, Springer,
2019
REFERENCES:
1. Sanjay K Mazumdar,”Composites Manufacturing: Materials, Product, and Process
Engineering”,CRC Press, 2016.
2. Gibson, Ronald F., “Principles of composite material mechanics”, CRC Press, 2016
234

Programme Outcomes/Programme Specific Outcomes
Mapping
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 2
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 2
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 2
Average
Correlation Level
3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 2
235
19MEE19 COMPUTER INTERGRATED MANUFACTURING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the application of computers in various aspects of Manufacturing viz, Design, Process
planning, Layout & Material Handling system and to get familiar with Robotics.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the principle of integrating manufacturing systems with computer
CO2: Apply the concepts of CAPP, CAQC and the usage of CMM for Production
CO3: Use group technology concept and clustering algorithms for effective utilization of
manufacturing systems
CO4: Describe the concepts of FMS, materials handling and storage systems.
CO5: Explain the working of Industrial robots and their application in manufacturing
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: Introduction to CIM & Automated system 9 hrs

Brief introduction to CAD -CAM and CIM– Manufacturing Planning, Manufacturing control-
Computerized elements of CIM system –Types of production - Manufacturing models and Metrics –
Mathematical models of Production Performance – Simple problems – Manufacturing Control –
Basic Elements of an Automated system – Levels of Automation – Lean Production and Just-In-Time
Production.
UNIT 2: Process planning 9 hrs

Process planning – Computer Aided Process Planning (CAPP) – Logical steps in Computer Aided
Process Planning – Aggregate Production Planning and the Master Production Schedule – Material
Requirement planning – Capacity Planning- Control Systems-Shop Floor Control-Inventory Control
– Brief on Manufacturing Resource Planning-II (MRP-II) & Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) -
Simple Problems. Computer- Aided Quality Control (CAQC): Types of Coordinate Measuring
Machines (CMM)
236
UNIT 3: Group Technology (GT) 9 hrs

Group Technology (GT): Part family – Parts classification and coding – Cellular Manufacturing –
Benefits of GT. Algorithms for Machine cell formation: Algorithms based on similarity coefficients:
Single Linkage Clustering Analysis (SLCA), Algorithms based on 34 sorting of Part-Machine
Incidence Matrix: Production Flow Analysis (PFA) – Rank Order Clustering (ROC), Cluster
Identification Algorithm (CIA) – Cellular Layouts.
UNIT 4: Flexible Manufacturing System (FMS) 9 hrs

Flexible Manufacturing System (FMS): Definition – Components – Types – Flexibilities – Materials
Handling and storage system: Conveyors: Types – Automated Guided Vehicle (AGV): Types,
Guidance and Routing – Automated Material Handling and Storage system (AS/RS): Types,
Components and Special features – Carousel system – WIP storage – Role of computers in FMS –
FMS Layouts – Benefits of FMS.
UNIT 5: Robotics 9 hrs

Industrial Robotics: Automation and Robotics – Robot Anatomy, Joint motions – End effectors:
Grippers and Tools – Robotic sensors – Robot vision system – Robot programming – Robot cell:
Types – Design and control. Applications of Industrial Robots in Material transfer, Machine
loading/unloading, Welding, Spray coating, Processing operations, Assembly and Inspection,
Advanced Applications.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1) Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer-integrated
Manufacturing”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2016.
2) Mikell P. Groover, Weiss, M., Nagel, R.N., and Odrey, N.G., “Industrial Robotics:
Technology, Programming and Applications”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New Delhi.
REFERENCES:
1) Radhakrishnan, P., Subramanyan, S., and Raju,.V,, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age
International Publishers, 2007.
2) YoremKoren, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, McGraw-Hill, 2017.
3) Rao, P.N, “CAD/CAM - Principles and Applications”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publications, 2017..
237

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3
Outcome
Course
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 2
s
CO3 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3
CO5 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 3
Average
3 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 3 1
Correlation Level
238
19MEE20 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on robot anatomy, analysis of position and orientation of robot manipulator in
the 3D space and Plan trajectories and applications of Robots in manufacturing
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the anatomy of robot and determine the gripper force of robotic arm.
CO2: Select an appropriate drive system for given application
CO3: Develop the forward and inverse kinematic model of manipulator with multi-degree of
freedom
CO4: Analyze the workspace of manipulator with multi-degree of freedom and generate a trajectory
in joint space.
CO5: Describe the role of robot in automation process.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTICS 9 hrs

Definition, Robot fundamentals, anatomy, specifications, Robot arm, Robot end effectors – Classification,
Types of grippers, Drive systems for grippers, Gripper force analysis - Sensors, types of sensors,
actuators, applications of robots - Introduction to swarm robot, Industry 4.0
UNIT 2: - ROBOT ACTUATORS 9 hrs

Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators - Electrical actuators - Brushless permanent magnet DC Motor - AC
servomotor - Stepper Motor – Microactuators – Microgrippers – Micromotor – Permanent Magnet
Synchronous Machine (PMSM) drive - Drive selection.
UNIT 3: ROBOT TRANSFORMATIONS 9 hrs
239
Introduction, position and orientation of objects, objects coordinate frame totation matrix, Euler
angles - Roll, pitch and yaw angles coordinate Transformations, Link coordinates D-H
Representation, The ARM equation - Direct kinematic analysis for Four axis SCARA Robot and
three, five and six axis Articulated Robots - The inverse kinematics problem, General properties of
solutions - Tool configuration - Inverse kinematics of four axis SCARA robot and three and five
axis, Articulated robot.
UNIT 4: WORKSPACE ANALYSIS AND TRACJECTORY PLANNING 9 hrs

Workspace Analysis, work envelope of a Four axis SCARA robot and five axis articulated robot
workspace fixtures, the pick and place operations, Joint space technique - continuous path motion,
Interpolated motion, straight line motion and Cartesian space technique in trajectory planning.
UNIT 5: ROBOTS IN AUTOMATION 9 hrs

Introduction – Automation-advantages and goal-strategies for automation – current emphasis in
automation - Robots in Automatic Processing Operations - Robot Application in Manufacturing -
Material Transfer, Machine loading and unloading, Processing Operation, Assembly, Inspection,
Maintenance and Quality
Total Hours : 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.K.Saha, “Introduction to Robotics”, Second Edition, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited, 2014.
2. Groover M.P., Weis M., Nagel R.N. and Odrey N.G., “Industrial Robotics Technology,
Programming and Applications”, McGraw-Hill, Int., 2012.
REFERENCES:
1. Robert J. Schilling, “Fundamentals of Robotics Analysis and Control”, PHI Learning 1996.
2. Bernard Hodges, “Industrial Robotics”, Second Edition, Jaico Publishing house 1992.
3. S.R. Majumdar, Pneumatic Control, Tata Mc Graw Hill 2017.
4. A.K Gupta, S.K. Arora, Industrial Automation and Robotics, Laxmi Pubilaction (P) Ltd 2016.
5. Appu kuain. K.K,”Robotics”I.K International Publishing House(P) Ltd. 2007.
240

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 1 2 3 2
Outcomes
Course
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 3
CO5 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
Average
3 2 2 2 1 2 3 2
Correlation Level
241
19MEE21 MODERN MACHINING PROCESSES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To provide knowledge on recent developments in unconventional machining process.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Select suitable mechanical energy-based machining processes for industrial applications
CO2: Find the suitable machining process for machining electrically conductive materials
CO3: Choose appropriate chemical-electrochemical process for making complex profile in hard metals.
CO4: Select suitable thermal energy-based process for cutting and machining of the hard materials
CO5: Select processes for making micro machined parts
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9 hrs

Need for Modern Machining Processes – Classification- Abrasive Jet machining- Ultrasonic machining
- Principle, machining unit, tool materials, tool size, process characteristics, advantages, limitations,
applications. Abrasive flow machining - introduction, principle, equipment, process details, advantages,
limitations, and application.
UNIT 2: ELECTRO THERMAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9 hrs

Electrical Discharge Machining - introduction, principle, machine, dielectric fluid, spark erosion
generators, EDM tools, electrode holders, tool design, flushing, process characteristics, applications,
electrical discharge grinding, wire cut EDM.
UNIT 3: CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO CHEMICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9 hrs

Chemical Machining: fundamentals, Principle –classification and selection of Etchant –chemical milling
-Advantages and limitations – Applications- Electro-chemical machining - introduction, principle,
elements, machine, chemistry of process, metal removal rate, tool design, accuracy, surface finish,
242
economics, advantages, limitations, applications - electrochemical grinding - electrochemical deburring,

electrochemical honing, shaped tube electrolyte machining.
UNIT 4: THERMAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 9 hrs

Plasma Arc Machining (PAM) Process- Principle, Gas mixture, Types of Torches, Process Parameters,
Advantages, Limitations and Applications - Electron Beam Machining (EBM) Process- Generation and
control of electron beam, Advantages, Limitations and Applications- Laser Beam Machining (LBM)
Process- Thermal Features of LBM, Advantages, Limitations and Applications- Ion Beam Machining
(IBM) Process – Equipment, Process characteristics, Advantages and Limitations.
UNIT 5: MICROMACHINING 9 hrs

Micromachining- Introduction, Mechanical Micromachining- Microturning- Micro-EDM, Hybrid
Machining- Microforming and Microbending using Laser, Machining of Micro Gear, Micro Nozzle,
Micro Pin.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.K. Jain, “ Advanced Machining Process”, Allied Publishers, 2011.
2. P.C Pandey And H.S. Shan, “Modern Machining Process”, Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing
2017.
3. V.K. Jain, “Introduction to Micromachining”, Narosa Publishing House, 2011
REFERENCES:
1. Amitabha Bhattacharya, “New Technology”, The Institution of Engineers, (India) 2017.
2. Hindustain Machine Tools “Production Technology”, HMT Banglore, Tata Mc Graw–Hill

Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2017.
243

Mapping
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 1 1
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 1
Outcomes
Course
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 1 1
Average
3 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 1 1
Correlation Level
244
19MEE22 SURFACE ENGINEERING AND CORROSION

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of surface engineering, wear mechanism, coating technologies and corrosion
fundamentals related to industrial applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of this course, students will be able to,
CO1: Explain the importance of surface treatment.
CO2: Describe different wear mechanism and calculate wear rate.
CO3: Elaborate different coating methods to enhance surface properties of materials.
CO4: Explain the corrosion mechanism and its types.
CO5: Evaluate the corrosion behavior of engineering materials.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO SURFACE ENGINEERING 9 hrs

Fundamentals of surface engineering: definition, scope, classification, and general principles, surface
dependent properties and failures, Surface and surface energy: Structure and types of interfaces.
Conventional surface treatment methods- hot dipping, Electro‐ plating, heat treatment methods
nitriding, carburizing, cyaniding, etc.
UNIT 2: WEAR 9 hrs

Types of wear - Simple theory of Sliding Wear Mechanism of sliding wear of metals – Abrasive wear
– Materials for Adhesive and Abrasive wear situations - Corrosive wear - Surface Fatigue wear
situations - Brittle Fracture - wear - Wear of Ceramics and Polymers – Wear Measurements.
UNIT 3: VAPOUR DEPOSITION 9 hrs

Definitions and Concepts, Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD), Evaporation, Sputtering, Ion Plating,
Plasma Nitriding, Process Capabilities, Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD), Metal Organic CVD,
245
Plasma Assisted CVD, Specific Industrial Applications
UNIT 4: MECHANISMS AND TYPES OF CORROSION 9 hrs

Principles of direct and Electro Chemical Corrosion, Hydrogen evolution and Oxygen absorption
mechanisms – Galvanic corrosion, Galvanic series-specific types of corrosion such as uniform,
Pitting, Intergranular, Cavitations, Crevice Fretting, Erosion and Stress Corrosion – Factors
influencing corrosion.
UNIT 5: CORROSION TESTING AND EVALUATION 9 hrs

Importance, classification, surface preparation, measuring and weighing, exposure techniques,
duration, planned interval tests. Modern theory –Principles-Application-Predicting corrosion
behaviour-corrosion prevention-corrosion rate measurements -Tafel Extrapolation-Linear
Polarization.
Total Hours: 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. K.G. Budinski, Surface Engineering for Wear Resistances, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs,
1988.
2. Marks Fontana. G., “Corrosion Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. J.R. Davis & Associates, Surface Engineering for Corrosion & Wear Resistance, ASM Intl.,
2001.
2. Modern Tribology Handbook- Volume I & II, Bharat Bhusan,2000, CRC Press.
3. Handbook of Deposition Technologies for Films and Coatings, Peter M. Martin, 3rd
edition,2009, Elsevier Publisher.
4. Introduction to Surface Engineering, P.A. Dearnley, 2017, Cambridge University Press.
5. Stephen cramer ASM Hand book volume-13, Corrosion ,9th edition of Metal Hand book.
2005.
246

Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 3 1 1
CO2 3 3 1 2 2 3 1 1
Outcomes
Course
CO3 3 2 1 2 2 3 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 2 3 1 2
CO5 3 3 1 2 2 3 1 2
Average
3 2 1 2 2 3 1 2
Correlation Level
247
19MEE23 INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about fundamentals and mechanism of friction, wear and lubrication and to
select materials for tribological applications.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion the students will able to
CO1: Explain the types of friction and its measurement
CO2: Explain the mechanism of wear, types and its measurement
CO3: Discuss the theory of lubrication and its types
CO4: Elaborate the lubrication theory of bearings
CO5: Describe the surface engineering techniques for tribological applications
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: SURFACES AND FRICTION 9 hrs

Topography of Engineering surfaces - Contact between surfaces - Sources of sliding Friction –
Adhesion – Ploughing - Energy dissipation mechanisms - Friction Characteristics of metals - Friction
of non-metals - Friction of lamellar solids - friction of Ceramic materials and polymers - Rolling
Friction - Source of Rolling Friction – Stick slip motion - Measurement of Friction
UNIT 2: WEAR 9 hrs

Definition - types of wear - theory of sliding wear – mechanism of sliding wear of metals - Abrasive
wear – materials for adhesive and abrasive wear situations - corrosive wear - surface fatigue wear
situations - Brittle fracture - wear of ceramics and polymers - wear measurements.
UNIT 3: LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION TYPES 9 hrs

Types and properties of Lubricants - Testing methods - Hydrodynamic Lubrication – Elasto-
hydrodynamic lubrication- Boundary Lubrication - Solid Lubrication- Hydrostatic Lubrication.
248
UNIT 4: FILM LUBRICATION THEORY 9 hrs

Fluid film in simple shear - Viscous flow between very close parallel plates - Shear stress variation
Reynolds Equation for film Lubrication - High speed unloaded journal bearings - Loaded journal
bearings – Reaction torque on the bearings - Virtual Co-efficient of friction - The Sommerfield
diagram.
UNIT 5: SURFACE ENGINEERING AND MATERIALS FOR BEARINGS 9hrs

Surface modifications - Transformation Hardening, surface fusion - Thermo chemical processes –
Surface coatings - Plating and anodizing - Fusion Processes - Vapour Phase processes - Materials for
rolling Element bearings - Materials for fluid film bearings - Materials for marginally lubricated and
dry bearings.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. A. Harnoy. ―Bearing Design in Machinery ―Marcel Dekker Inc, New York, 2023..
REFERENCES:
1. M. M. Khonsari& E. R. Booser, ―Applied Tribology‖, John Willey &Sons, New York, 2017.
2. E. P. Bowden and Tabor.D., ―Friction and Lubrication ―, Heinemann Educational Books
Ltd.,2001..
3. Cameron, ―Basic Lubrication theory‖, Longman, U.K., 1981.
4. M. J. Neale,’Tribology Handbook”, Butterworth-Heinemann, U.K., 2013.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 1 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 1 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 1 1
Average
3 3 2 1 1 1 3 1 1
Correlation Level
249
19MEE24 NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING AND EVALUATION

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To introduce the various aspects of Non- destructive testing and evaluation of materials and its
suitability for testing of mechanical components
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon the completion, the student will able to
CO1: Describe the principle of non-destructive testing methods
CO2: Acquire knowledge about testing by liquid penetrant and magnetic particle inspection.
CO3: Identify the use of thermography and eddy current inspection methods in manufacturing.
CO4: Impart knowledge about testing by ultrasonic testing and radiography techniques
CO5: Explain the application of acoustic emission testing methods
COURSE CONTENT:

Non-Destructive Testing Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non-Destructive Testing
Methods for the detection of manufacturing defects and material characterization- Relative merits
and limitations, Various physical characteristics of materials and their applications in ND- Visual
Inspection-Unaided and aided.
UNIT 2: LIQUID PENETRANT AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION 9 hrs

Liquid Penetrant Testing- Principles, types and properties of liquid penetrants, developers,
advantages and limitations, Testing Procedure, Interpretation of results - Magnetic Particles
Testing- Theory of magnetism, Inspection materials, Magnetization methods, Interpretation and
evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods of demagnetization, Residual magnetism.
250
UNIT 3: THERMOGRAPHY & EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION 9 hrs

Thermography- Principles, Contact and non-contact inspection methods, Techniques for applying
liquid crystals, Advantages and limitation - infrared radiation and infrared detectors,
Instrumentations and methods, applications. Eddy Current Testing-Generation of eddy currents,
Properties of eddy currents, Eddy current sensing elements, Probes, Instrumentation, Types of
arrangement, Applications, advantages, Limitations, Interpretation/Evaluation.
UNIT 4: ULTRASONIC TESTING & RADIOGRAPHY 9 hrs

Ultrasonic Testing-Principle, Transducers, transmission and pulse-echo method, straight beam and
angle beam, instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Array ultrasound,
Time of Flight Diffraction. Radiography: Production of X-rays – Characteristics rays and white
rays- Tube current and voltage – Source of γ ray - Half-life period- penetrating power – Absorption
of x and γ ray – Radiation contrast and film contrast- Exposure charts - penetrometers and
sensitivity –Safety.
UNIT 5: RECENT TECHNIQUES 9 hrs

Principle of acoustic emission- Instrumentation for Non-destructive testing- Principles of
holography-Applications of holographic techniques - Non-destructive Inspection-Advantages and
limitations- Other techniques.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu “Practical Non-Destructive Testing,

Narosa Publishing House, 2009.
2. Ravi Prakash,” Non-Destructive Testing Techniques, 1st revised edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1. Paul E Mix, Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide, Wiley, 2nd Edition
New Jersey, 2005.
251
2. Louis Cartz, Nondestructive Testing, Louis ,ASM International 1995.


Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
Average
3 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1
Correlation Level
252
19MEE25 LEAN MANUFACTURING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To study the various tools for Lean Manufacturing (LM).
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Identify tools to implement LM system in an organization.
CO2: Applying JIT and TPM for cellular manufacturing.
CO3: Classify the tools used for set up time reduction.
CO4: Apply the six sigma implementation.
CO5: Apply the productivity of the organization using LM tools.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO LEAN MANUFACTURING 9 hrs
Conventional Manufacturing versus Lean Manufacturing – Principles of Lean Manufacturing –
Basic elements of lean manufacturing – Introduction to LM Tools.
UNIT 2: CELLULAR MANUFACTURING, JIT, TPM 9 hrs

Cellular Manufacturing – Types of Layout, Principles of Cell layout, Implementation. JIT –
Principles of JIT and Implementation of Kanban. TPM – Pillars of TPM, Principles and
implementation of TPM.
UNIT 3: SET UP TIME REDUCTION, TQM, 5S, VSM 9 hrs

Set up time reduction – Definition, philosophies and reduction approaches. TQM – Principles and
implementation. 5S Principles and implementation - Value stream mapping - Procedure and
principles.
UNIT 4: SIX SIGMA 9 hrs

Six Sigma – Definition, statistical considerations, variability reduction, design of experiments – Six
Sigma implementation.
253
UNIT 5: CASE STUDIES 9 hrs

Various case studies of implementation of LM at Industries
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Design and Analysis of Lean Production Systems, Ronald G. Askin & Jeffrey B. Goldberg,
John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
REFERENCES:
1. Mikell P. Groover ‗Automation, Production Systems and CIM, 2016
2. Rother M. and Shook J, 1999 ‗Learning to See: Value Stream Mapping to Add Value and
Eliminate Muda‘ , Lean Enterprise Institute, Brookline, MA.
MAPPING OF PROGRAMME OUTCOMES WITH COURSE OUTCOMES.
Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 2 1
Average
3 2 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
Correlation Level
254
19MEE26 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about the concepts of industrial engineering and their application for improved
productivity and safety.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course the students will be able to
CO1 : Explain the concepts of work study and work measurement
CO2 : Describe the techniques for plant layout and types of material handling devices.
CO3 : Analyze Ergonomic design of system and increase productivity.
CO4 : Explain the concepts of production planning & control.
CO5 : Apply suitable wage and incentive schemes for work
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: WORK MEASUREMENT AND WORK STUDY 9 hrs
Work measurement-techniques, Production study-Time study, Standard time, rating factors-Work
sampling - Work study techniques - Human factors - Work study and productivity - method study-
techniques and procedures - charging techniques - Motion economy principles - SIMO chart -
Ergonomics' and Industrial design.
UNIT 2: PLANT LAYOUT AND MATERIAL HANDLING 9 hrs

Plant location, site selection- Plant layout types, need, factors influencing the layout -Tools and
techniques for developing layout, process chart, flow diagram, string diagram, Template and Scale
models - Layout Planning procedure - Assembly line balancing. Material Handling - scope and
importance - Types of material handling systems - factors influencing material handling - methods
of material handling.
UNIT 3: WORK DESIGN ERGONIMICS, PRODUCTION & PRODUCTIVITY 9 hrs

Introduction to work design - Work design for increased productivity. Introduction to job design -
Effective job design - Environmental factors, organizational factors & behavioral factors.
255
Ergonomics – objectives,' system approach of ergonomic model - Man-machine system -

Production and productivity – definition - function and type of production - Productivity
measurement.
UNIT 4: PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL 9 hrs

Objectives of PPC - Functions of PPC - Aspects of product development and design - Principles of
Standardization, specialization-. Forecasting models - Aggregate production planning – Scheduling -
Materials Requirement Planning.
UNIT 5: WAGES AND INCENTIVES 9 hrs

Wages and salary administration - Meaning principles - Techniques of wage fixation -Job
evaluation - Merit rating - Methods of wage payment - Incentive scheme, Types, advantages and
disadvantages - Productivity base incentives - Evaluation of incentive scheme.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Khanna.O.P, “Industrial Engineering and Management”, Dhanpat Rai Publications Pvt Ltd, 2018.
REFERENCES:
1. Kumar.B, “Industrial Engineering and Management”, 9th edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,
2005.
2. James M. Apple, “Principles of Layout and Material Handling”, Ronald Press, 2007.
3. Maynard.H,”Industrial Engineering Hand Book”, McGraw Hill Book Co., NewYork, 2010.
Mapping
CO1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2
CO5 2 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 3
Average
2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2
Correlation Level
256
19MEE27 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the application of nanotechnology in both medical and engineering field.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the basics of nano technology and nano materials
CO2: Compare the properties of nano particles with normal metal powders
CO3: Characterize the nano particles with the aid of various equipments
CO4: Describe the applications of nano technology in medical and allied areas
CO5: Describe the applications of nanotechnology in engineering
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: BASICS OF NANOTECHNOLOGY 9 hrs

Definition of nanotechnology - Living with nanoparticles -Nanotechnology, a Future trillion dollar
business - Nanotechnology will develop in stages; Nanotechnology products and applications - Future
applications of nanotechnology - Medical applications.
UNIT 2: SCIENCE OF NANOTECHNOLOGY 9 hrs

Matter - Properties of matter change at the nanoscale - Matter‘s smallest particles: Elements - Smallest
part of an element: The atom - Inside the Atom: Subatomic particles - Models of the atoms - Atoms and
molecules -Molecules and chemical bonding - Molecular self-Assembly and nanofabrication - Soap
bubbles self-assemble - Using the self-assembly strategy to make products.
UNIT 3: NANOTECHNOLOGY TOOLS 9 hrs

Optical microscopes - Scanning probe microscopes - Scanning tunneling microscopes - Atomic force
microscopes - Magnetic force microscopes -Electron microscopes - Scanning electron microscope –
Transmission electron microscope - Nanofabrication clean room facilities.
257
UNIT 4: NANOTECHNOLOGY IN MEDICALAPPLICATIONS 9 hrs

Cardiovascular diseases - Cancer detection and diagnosis - Diabetes and nanotechnology - Implants and
prosthetics - Nanotechnology and burn victims - Diagnosis and therapy - Drug delivery using
nanoparticles -Nanotechnology fights infections - Pharmaceutical nanotechnology research.
UNIT 5: NANO TECHNOLOGY IN ENGINEERINGAPPLICATIONS 9 hrs

Electronics and computers - Automobile/vehicle industry – Aircraft potential and metal rubber - Sporting
goods equipment - Chewing gum and nanocrystals - Apparel industry - Cosmetic - Appliances -Paint and
other water resistance coatings - Removing windshield fog - Self-cleaning glass - Antibacterial cleansers -
Medical bandages - Solar energy: Photovoltaic cells - working principle - Battery technology- Fuel cells
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John Mongillo, ―Nanotechnology 101, Greenwood Press, 2007.
2. Lynn E Foster, ―Nanotechnology: Science, Innovation and Opportunity‖, Prentice Hall, 2005.
REFERENCES:
1. Natokon The Open source Handbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology,2015.
2. Joe Anne Shatkin, ―Nanotechnology: Health and environmental risks, CRC press, 2012.
3. http://www.understandingnano.com/nanotech-applications.html.
4. http://www.nano.gov/you/nanotechnology-benefits.
Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1
Average
3 2 2 1 1 3 2 1
Correlation Level
258
259
THERMAL
260
19MEE28 COMPRESSIBLE FLOW AND ITS FUNDAMENTALS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about fundamentals of compressible flow in constant area duct, variable area
ducts and shock waves and its application in propulsion systems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Apply the concepts of isentropic flow in variable area ducts such as nozzle and diffuser
CO2: Analyze the concept of compressible flow in constant area duct with friction, heat transfer and
Constant temperature.
CO3: Examine the effect of compression and expansion waves.
CO4: Analyze the flow through aircraft propulsion systems and its performance.
CO5: Explain the working principles of rocket engines and their performance.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: BASIC CONCEPTS AND ISENTROPIC FLOWS 9 hrs
Energy and momentum equations of compressible fluid flows, Concepts of compressible flow –
Mach waves and Mach cone. Flow regimes, effect of Mach number on compressibility. Stagnation,
static, critical properties and their interrelationship. Isentropic flow and its relations. Isentropic flow
through variable area ducts – nozzles and diffusers.
UNIT 2: FLOW THROUGH DUCTS 9 hrs

Flows through constant area ducts- Rayleigh flow- Fanno flow – variation of flow properties.
Choking concept, Isothermal flow with friction.
UNIT 3: NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCKS 9 hrs

Governing equations, variation of flow parameters like static pressure, static temperature, density,
stagnation pressure and entropy across the normal shock and oblique shock, Prandtl - Meyer
equation, impossibility of shock in subsonic flows, flow in convergent and divergent nozzle with
shock- normal shock in Fanno and Rayleigh flows.
261
UNIT 4: JET PROPULSION 9 hrs

Theory of jet propulsion – Thrust equation – Thrust power and propulsive efficiency – Operating
principle, cycle analysis and use of stagnation state. Performance of ram jet, turbojet, and turbofan
and turbo prop engines.
UNIT 5: SPACE PROPULSION 9 hrs

Types of rocket engines: Solid, Liquid and Hybrid Propellant Rockets – Propellants- feeding systems
– Ignition and combustion – Theory of rocket propulsion – Performance study – Staging – Terminal
and characteristic velocity - Applications – space flights.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Yahya, S.M. “Fundamentals of Compressible Flow with aircraft and rocket propulsion”, New
Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2018.
2. Anderson, J.D., "Modern Compressible flow", 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2017.
3. G.P.Sutton, “Rocket Propulsion Elements”,7th Edition, A wiley interscience publication, US
2016.
4. E.Rathakrishnan., “Gas Dynamics” Prentice Hall of India private limited, 2014.
REFERENCES:
1. Cohen. H., G.E.C. Rogers and Saravanamutto, "Gas Turbine Theory", Longman Group
Ltd.,2017.
2. Ganesan. V., "Gas Turbines", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2017.
3. Shapiro. A.H.," Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible fluid Flow", John wiley,
New York, 1977.
4. Zucrow. N.J., "Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbines", John Wiley, New York, 1970
5. Hill. P. and C. Peterson, "Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion", Addison – Wesley
Publishing company, 2009. Somasundaram. PR.S.L., "Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsions",
New Age International Publishers, 1996.
262

Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO5 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 1
Average
3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
Correlation Level
263
19MEE29 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart the knowledge of numerical techniques to the solution of fluid dynamics and
heat transfer problems.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
CO1: Formulate the governing equation of fluid dynamics with boundary conditions.
CO2: Implement control volume approach to solve fluid dynamics problems.
CO3: Analyze the heat conduction problem using finite difference and finite volume method.
CO4: Analyze convection and diffusion problems using finite difference and finite volume method.
CO5: Analyze the flow fields for fluid dynamics.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 9 hrs

Basics of computational fluid dynamics – Governing equations of fluid dynamics – Continuity,
Momentum and Energy equations – Chemical species transport – Physical boundary conditions –
Time-averaged equations for turbulent flow – Turbulence – Kinetic –Energy equations –
Mathematical behavior of PDEs on CFD: Elliptic, parabolic and hyperbolic equations.
UNIT 2: DISCRETIZATION AND SOLUTION METHODOLOGIES 9 hrs

Methods of deriving the discretization equations – Taylor series formulation – Finite difference
method – Control volume formulation – Spectral method. Solution methodologies: Direct and
iterative methods – Thomas algorithm – Relaxation method – Alternating direction- Implicit method.
UNIT 3: HEAT CONDUCTION 9 hrs

Finite difference and finite volume formulation of steady/transient one-dimensional conduction
equation – Source term linearization – Incorporating boundary conditions – Finite volume
264
formulations for two and three dimensional conduction problems.
UNIT 4: CONVECTION AND DIFFUSION 9 hrs

Finite volume formulation of steady one-dimensional convection and diffusion problems – Central,
upwind, hybrid and power-law schemes – Discretization equations for two dimensional convection
and diffusion.
UNIT 5: CALCULATION OF FLOW FIELD 9 hrs

Representation of the pressure – Gradient term and continuity equation – Staggered grid –
Momentum equations – Pressure and velocity corrections- Pressure Correction
equation –SIMPLE algorithm and its variants – Turbulence models: mixing length model – Two
equation (k-ε) models.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Versteeg, H.K. and Malalasekera, W, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics:
The Finite Volume Method”, Longman, 2007.
2. Muralidhar, K. and Sundarajan, T. “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa
Publishing House, 2009.
REFERENCES:
1) John D. Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics – The Basics with Applications”, McGraw Hill,
New York, 2017.
2) 2. Patankar, S.V, “Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow”, McGraw-Hill, 2017.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2
Average
3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2
Correlation Level
265
19MEE30 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about different types of power plants and its economics of load sharing
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO 1: Describe the working principle of steam power plant and boilers.
CO 2: Explain the various systems associated with the steam power plant.
CO 3: Describe the working principle of nuclear power plants and hydel power plants.
CO 4: Illustrate the working of diesel and gas turbine power plant
CO 5: Explain the different sources of renewable energy and calculate the economics of power plants
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO POWER PLANTS & BOILERS 9 hrs

Layout of Steam power plant - Components, Selection. Steam Boilers and Cycles - High Pressure
Boilers- La Mount Boiler, Benson Boiler, Loeffler Boiler, Schmidt-Hartmann Boiler- Super Critical and
Supercharged Boilers – Fluidized Bed Boilers.
UNIT 2: STEAM POWER PLANT 9 hrs

Fuel and Ash Handling, Combustion Equipment for burning coal, Mechanical Stokers, Pulveriser,
Electrostatic Precipitator, Fabric filters & Bag filters - Draught – different types - Surface Condenser
and Cooling towers
UNIT 3: NUCLEAR AND HYDEL POWER PLANTS 9 hrs

Nuclear Energy – Fission and Fusion, Types of Reactors, Pressurized water reactor, Boiling Water
Reactor, Liquid Metal fast breeder reactor, CANDU type reactors - Waste Disposal and safety - Hydel
power plant – Selection of site for a Hydroelectric Power Plant, Hydrological cycle, Hydro graphs,
Essential Elements, Selection of turbines, Governing of hydraulic Turbines
266
UNIT 4: DIESEL AND GAS TURBINE POWER PLANT 9 hrs

Layout of Diesel Power Plants, Components, and Selection of Engine Type, Gas Turbine Power Plant –
Layout, Fuels - Gas Turbine Material – Open and Closed Cycles – Reheating, Regeneration and
Intercooling- Combined cycle power plant.
UNIT 5: OTHER POWER PLANTS AND ECONOMICS OF POWER PLANTS

9 hrs
MACHINING
Geo thermal – OTEC- Tidal – Pumped storage – Solar thermal power plants- Wind Energy and Wind
turbines- Magneto Hydrodynamic generator (MHD)- Load curves - Cost of Electric Energy – Fixed and
operating Costs – Energy Rates – Types of Tariffs – Economics of load sharing.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. C . Arora, S. Domkundwar, A course in Power Plant Engineering, Dhanpatrai & Sons, New
Delhi, 2016.
2. Rajput, R.K. ―Power Plant Engineering, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 2016.
3. G. R. Nagpal, Power Plant Engineering, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2002
REFERENCES:
1.K.K.Ramalingam, Power Plant Engineering, Scitech Publications (India) Private Limited, 2015.
2.G. D. Rai, Introduction to Power Plant Technology, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2013
3. P. K. Nag, Power plant Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill Company Private Limited, New Delhi,
2017.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 1 1 2 3 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 1 1 2 3 1 2
CO3 3 3 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 2 3 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 2 2 3 2 1
Average
3 3 1 1 2 2 3 1 1
Correlation Level
267
19MEE31 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on working principles of refrigeration and air conditioning systems and its
components, properties of refrigerants and cooling load estimation for air conditioning
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Demonstrate the refrigeration system.
CO2 : Explain the principles of refrigeration systems and distinguish primary and secondary
Refrigerants.
CO3: Select the refrigeration components according to the requirements.
CO4: Design the air distribution systems for air conditioning.
CO5: Estimate the cooling load for air conditioning.
(Use of Approved Refrigeration and Air conditioning Tables and Charts are Permitted)
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: REFRIGERATION CYCLE AND VAPOUR COMPRESSION
9 hrs
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Review of thermodynamic principles of refrigeration-Aircraft refrigeration cycles -Reversed Carnot
cycle and Bell Coleman cycle-Simple vapour compression refrigeration cycle-Use of P-H charts,
Compound compression refrigeration cycles and Cascade refrigeration system.
UNIT 2 : REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS AND REFRIGERANTS 9 hrs

Vapour absorption refrigeration system-Aqua Ammonia Lithium Bromide system and Electrolux
refrigeration system-Steam jet refrigeration system-Solar refrigeration system- Refrigerants - Primary
and secondary refrigerants-Refrigerant selection criteria based on their properties-Designation of
refrigerants-Comparison of various synthetic and natural refrigerants and importance of refrigerant
mixtures.
268
UNIT 3: SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9 hrs

Compressors-reciprocating, Rotary and centrifugal compressors, Evaporators - flooded, dry
expansion, shell and tube and double pipe evaporators. Condensers - air cooled, water cooled and
evaporative condensers. Expansion devices - automatic, capillary tube and thermostatic expansion
valve.
UNIT 4: AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENTS 9 hrs

Air distribution systems - Study of different types of duct systems-methods of duct design, duct
insulation-Air cleaning methods-Air filters, Humidifiers , Dehumidifiers and air washer.
UNIT 5: PSYCHROMETRY AND COOLING LOAD ESTIMATION FOR AIR

9 hrs
CONDITIONING
Psychrometry, psychometric processes, use of psychrometric charts, moist air behaviour, effective
temperatures, sensible heat factor ratio and cooling load estimation for an air conditioned space.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Manohar Prasad, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, New Age International
Publisher.2015.
2. Arora, C.P, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2017.
3. Roy J. Dossat, Thomas J. Horan, “Principles of Refrigeration”, Prentice Hall, 2002.
REFERENCES:
1. Stoecker, N.F. and Jones, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. Jordon and Prister, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Prentice Hall, 1985.
3. P.N. Ananthanarayanan, “Basic Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw, 2013.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
Average
3 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2 2
Correlation Level
269
19MEE32 TURBO MACHINERY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of turbo machines such as turbine, compressor and blowers.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the basic principles of operation, classifications, types and applications of pumps,
fans, blowers and compressors.
CO2: Analyze thermodynamically the performance of turbo machines.
CO3: Describe the geometry of blades, cascade parameters, performances of cascade.
CO4: Describe performance, design parameters and specifications of turbo machines used for
different applications.
CO5: Describe the principles of operations, performance of different types of wind turbine and their
applications.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: TURBO SYSTEMS-INTRODUCTION 9 hrs
Turbo Machine: Basic concept and significant, Turbines, Compressors, Fan, blowers - classifications
and types, working principles, applications, Comparison between positive displacement machine
with turbo machine, govering equation, Euler’s equation.
UNIT 2:TURBO MACHINES AND THERMODYNAMIC PRINCIPLES 9 hrs

Turbo machine - Application of Laws of thermodynamics, thermal performance - different types of
thermal efficiencies, Effect of re-heat factor in turbine, Effect of pre-heat factor in compressor,
Simple problems in turbine and compressor.
UNIT 3:DYNAMIC ANALYSIS 9 hrs

Aerofoil section, classification, lift and drag on the blade, blade geometry, flow through cascades,
cascade analysis, different types of losses, estimation of losses, design concepts.
270
UNIT 4:SELECTION OF TURBO-MACHINES 9 hrs

Non-dimensional parameters - Performance of turbo machines - losses and performance curves -
design condition and off design conditions – design parameters - specifications - selection criteria..
UNIT 5:WIND TURBINES 9 hrs

Types - Construction and working - performance - latest developments -small and micro wind mills.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. YahyaS M,―Turbines,Compressors&Fans‖,Tata-McGrawHill Co.,2nd Edition (2017).
REFERENCES:
1. Kadambi V and Manohar Prasad,―An Introduction to energy conversion‖,VolumeIII- Turbo
machinery, New Age International Publishers (P)Ltd 2011.
2. Gopalakrishnan GandPrithvi Raj D,―A Treatiseon Turbo machines‖,Scitech Publications India
Pvt. Ltd.,2008.
3. Wengshilie, ―Basis for Thermal Energy and Dynamic Machine‖ ,Higher Education Press,
2008.
4. WilsonD G, KorakianitisT, ―Thedesign of high-efficiency turbo machineryandgas turbines‖,
Prentice Hall, 2008.
5. Logan R, RamendraR, ―Handbook of Turbomachinery, Marcel-Dekker, 2007.
6. WilliamWPerg, ―Fundamentals of Turbomachinery‖John Wiley&Sons,Inc. 2008.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO5 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 1
Average
3 3 3 2 1 1 3 1
Correlation Level
271
19MEE33 ENERGY AND EFFICIENCY MANAGEMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To understand the basics of energy conservation, audit and management.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the basics of energy conservation and management.
CO2: Explain the basics of energy auditing in industries.
CO3: Predict the energy conservation opportunities in thermal systems
CO4: Estimate the energy efficiency in thermal auxiliary units.
CO5: Identify the energy conservation opportunities in electrical systems.
COURSE CONTENT:
Energy Scenario - Principles and Imperatives of Energy Conservation - Energy Consumption
Pattern - Resource Availability - Role of Energy Managers in Industries.
UNIT 2: ENERGY AUDITING 9 hrs

Thermal Energy Auditing: Energy Audit - Purpose, Methodology with respect to Process Industries -
Power Plants, Boilers etc. - Characteristic Method Employed in Certain Energy Intensive Industries.
Electrical Energy Auditing: Potential Areas for Electrical Energy Conservation in Various Industries.
UNIT 3: ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL SYSTEMS 9 hrs

Energy conservation opportunities - Boiler efficiency calculation, evaporation ratio and efficiency for
coal, oil and gas. Soot blowing and soot deposit reduction, reasons for boiler tube failures. Steam System-
identifying opportunities for energy savings assessment of steam distribution losses, steam leakages,
steam trapping, condensate and flash steam recovery system. Furnaces - Classification, general fuel
economy measures in furnaces, excess air, heat distribution, temperature control, draft control, waste heat
recovery.
272
UNIT 4: ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL AUXILIARY UNIT 9 hrs

Energy saving potential in Heat Exchangers, Waste Heat Recovery, Cogeneration systems Energy
conservation opportunities: Insulation and Refractories: Insulation-types and application, economic
thickness of insulation, heat savings and application criteria, Refractory-types, selection and application
of refractories, heat loss. Cold insulation.
UNIT 5: ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9 hrs

Heating, ventilation, air conditioning (HVAC) and Refrigeration System: Factors affecting Refrigeration
and Air conditioning system performance and savings Opportunities in Electrical Heating, Lighting
System, Cable Selection - Energy Efficient Motors - Factors Involved in Determination of Motor
Efficiency- Adjustable AC Drives, Application & its use Variable Speed Drives Belt Drives.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. CB Smith, Kelly E. Parmenter, Energy Management Principles- Applications, Benefits, Savings,
Elsevier, 2015
2. Witte, Larry C, Industrial Energy Management & Utilization, Hemisphere Publishers,
Washington, 1988.
REFERENCES:
1. Diamant, RME, Total Energy, Pergamon, Oxford, 1970
2. Hamies, Energy Auditing and Conservation; Methods, Measurements, Management & Case
Study, Hemisphere, Washington, 1980.
3. J. Krieder and A. Rabl, Heating and Cooling of Buildings-Design for Efficiency, McGraw Hill
Publication, 1994.
4. Trivedi, PR, Jolka KR, Energy Management, Commonwealth Publication, New Delhi, 1997
5. Dale R Patrick, Stephen W Fardo, Energy Conservation Guidebook, Fairmont Press; 2nd Edition,
2007
6. Wilson, E.J., Gerard, D., Carbon Capture and Sequestration: Integrating
Technology, Monitoring and Regulation. Blackwell Publishing, Oxford, UK, 2007
273
7. Albert Thumann, Handbook of Energy Audits,6th Edition, The Fairmont Press, 2013
8. W.C. Turner, Steve Doty, Energy management handbook, 6th Edition, CRC press,2016
9. Refresher course for certified Energy managers and Auditors, Bureau of Energy Efficiency,
Government of India, 2018.
Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
CO3 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
CO4 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
CO5 3 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
Average
3 3 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 3
Correlation Level
274
19MEE34 ADVANCED THERMODYNAMICS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about advanced thermodynamics concepts to analyse multi components system
and to use statistical thermodynamic approach for macroscopic and microscopic thermodynamic
property evaluation of system.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Evaluate the thermodynamics properties and availability of a system.
CO2: Explain the behavior of real gas and multi component systems.
CO3: Analyse the thermodynamics of chemical reactions of Reacting systems.
CO4: Evaluate macroscopic and microscopic property by statistical thermodynamic approach.
CO5: Explain the principles of irreversible thermodynamics and its applications.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: AVAILABILITY ANALYSIS AND THERMODYNAMIC PROPERTY

9 hrs
RELATIONS
Reversible work - availability - irreversibility and second law - efficiency for a closed system and
steady state control volume. Availability analysis of simple cycles. Thermodynamic potentials.
Maxwell relations. Generalized relations for changes in entropy - internal energy and enthalpy -
generalized relations for Cp and CV. Clausius Clayperon equation, Joule–Thomson coefficient.
Bridgeman tables for thermodynamic relations.
UNIT 2: REAL GAS BEHAVIOUR AND MULTI – COMPONENT SYSTEMS 9 hrs

Different equations of state – fugacity – compressibility - principle of corresponding states - Use of
generalized charts for enthalpy and entropy departure - fugacity coefficient, Lee – Kesler generalized
three parameter tables. Fundamental property relations for systems of variable composition. Partial
molar properties. Real gas mixtures - Ideal solution of real gases and liquid - equilibrium in multi
phase systems - Gibbs phase rule for non reactive components.
275
UNIT 3: CHEMICAL REACTIONS 9 hrs

Fuels and combustion, Theoretical and Actual Combustion Processes, Enthalpy of Formation and
Enthalpy of Combustion, First-Law Analysis of Reacting Systems, Steady-Flow Systems, Closed
Systems- Adiabatic Flame Temperature- Entropy Change of Reacting Systems – Second Law
Analysis of Reacting systems
UNIT 4: STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS 9 hrs

Microstates and Macrostates - thermodynamic probability - degeneracy of energy levels - Maxwell –
Boltzman, Fermi – Diarc and Bose – Einstein statistics - microscopic interpretation of heat and work,
evaluation of entropy, partition function, calculation of the Macroscopic properties from partition
functions. Equilibirium constant statistical thermodynamics approach.
UNIT 5: PRINCIPLES OF IRREVERSIBLE THERMODYNAMICS AND

9 hrs
APPLICATIONS
Conjugate fluxes and forces – linearized relations -reciprocity relations - Thermo electric
phenomena, formulations, Petlier and Seeback effect, Thomson effect, Power generation,
Refrigeration-heat conduction in anisotropic material.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bejan, A., Advanced Engineering Thermodynamics, Fourth Edition, John Wiley and Sons,
2016.
2. P.K.Nag, Engineering Thermodynamics, Fifth Edition, McGraw Hill Education (India)
Pvt.Ltd,2018.
REFERENCES:
1) Rao,Y.Y.C., Postulational and Statistical Thermodynamics,Applied Publisher Limited, New

Delhi,1994.
2) Kenneth K. Kuo, Principles of Combustion, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2012.
3) Holman J.P., Thermodynamics, Fourth Edition, McGraw – Hill Inc., 1988.
4) Desmond E. Winterbone, Advanced Engineering Thermodynamics, 2nd Edition, 2015
276

Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 1
Average
3 3 3 3 1 1 3 2 1
Correlation Level
277
19MEE35 ROCKET ENGINEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about the technologies for the propulsion system of rockets
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Analyse and design model ramjet engines.
CO2: Acquire knowledge in field of supersonic combustion process and their difficulties involved.
CO3: Predict the internal ballistic properties based on mission requirements.
CO4: Determine operational and performance characteristics of liquid and hybrid rockets.
CO5: Acquire knowledge in the field of advance propulsive systems and their futuristic applications.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: RAMJET PROPULSION 9 hrs

Operating principle of ramjet engine – various components of ramjet engines and their efficiencies –
modes of inlet operation - Combustion in ramjet engine –- performance characteristics – sample
ramjet design calculations – flame stability problems in ramjet combustors –integral ram rockets.
UNIT 2: SCRAMJET PROPULSION 9 hrs

Introduction to hypersonic air breathing propulsion, hypersonic vehicles and supersonic combustion-
need for supersonic combustion for hypersonic propulsion – salient features of scramjet engine and
its applications for hypersonic vehicles – problems associated with supersonic combustion –
engine/airframe integration aspects of hypersonic vehicles – various types scramjet combustors – fuel
injection schemes in scramjet combustors – one dimensional models for supersonic combustion using
method of influence coefficients.
278
UNIT 3: SOLID ROCKET MOTOR 9 hrs

Type of rockets – specific impulse of a rocket– rocket performance – Real and ideal nozzle - solid
propellants– selection criteria of solid propellants – – internal ballistics – burning rate - propellant
grain design considerations – erosive burning in solid rockets – Igniters – types of igniters.
UNIT 4: LIQUID AND HYBRID ROCKET ENGINE 9 hrs

liquid propellant rockets – selection of liquid propellants – various feed systems for liquid rockets -
thrust control in liquid rockets – cooling in liquid rockets and the associated heat transfer problems –
advantages of liquid rockets over solid rockets - introduction to hybrid propulsion – advantages and
limitations of hybrid propulsion - static testing of rockets and safety considerations.
UNIT 5: ADVANCED PROPULSION TECHNIQUES 9 hrs

Introduction to nozzle less propulsion and basic concepts - Electric rocket propulsion – Ion
propulsion – Nuclear rocket – comparison of performance of these propulsion systems with chemical
rocket propulsion systems - Solar sail.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mathur, M.L. and Sharma, R.P., “Gas Turbine, Jet and Rocket Propulsion”, Standard
Publishers & Distributors, Delhi, 2nd edition 2014.
REFERENCES:
6. David H. Heiser and David T. Pratt., “Hypersonic Air breathing Propulsion”, AIAA
Education Series, 1999.
7. Sutton, G.P., “Rocket Propulsion Elements”, John Wiley & Sons; 8th Edition 2010
8. Martin J. Chiaverini and Kenneth K. Kuo, “Fundamentals of Hybrid Rocket Combustion and
Propulsion”, Progress in Astronautics and Aeronautics, 2007.
9. Ramamurthi K, “Rocket Propulsion”, Macmillian publishers India Ltd, 1st edition, 2016.
Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1
CO5 2 1 1 2 2 1
Average
3 2 1 1 2 2 1
Correlation Level
279
19MEE36 ADVANCED IC ENGINES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To learn the technological advancements in I.C Engine, combustion phenomena in S.I and C.I
engines and provide knowledge on pollutant formation and control.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Analyze the power cycles for IC engine.
CO2: Describe the fuel injection and combustion process of S.I Engines.
CO3: Explain the fuel injection and combustion process of C.I Engines.
CO4: Describe the concepts of Non-Conventional IC Engines and Alternative Fuel.
CO5: Identify the causes of pollution and its control in I.C Engines.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: ENGINE CYCLE ANALYSIS 9 hrs

Ideal air, fuel air cycle and actual cycle analysis -Progressive combustion analysis in SI engines.
Parametric studies on work output, efficiency and other engine performance.
UNIT 2: SPARK IGNITION ENGINES 9 hrs

Mixture requirements – Fuel injection systems – Mono-point, Multipoint & Direct injection - Stages
of combustion – Normal and Abnormal combustion – Knock - Factors affecting knock – Combustion
chambers.
UNIT 3: COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES 9 hrs

Diesel Fuel Injection Systems - Stages of combustion – Knocking – Factors affecting knock – Direct
and Indirect injection systems – Combustion chambers – Fuel Spray behavior – Spray structure and
spray penetration – Air motion - Introduction to Turbo charging.
280
UNIT 4: NON-CONVENTIONAL IC ENGINES AND ALTERNATIVE FUEL 9 hrs

Concept of L.H.R. engine and its recent developments-Variable compression ratio engine and its use
in engine research-Dual fuel engine concept for multi fuel usage in CI engines - Locomotive and
marine engines.Hydrogen,LPG,Bio-Diesel-their Properties-Engine modification-CRDI system-Hybrid
Electric Vehicle-Nox Adsorbers.
UNIT 5: POLLUTANT FORMATION AND CONTROL 9 hrs

Pollutant – Sources – Formation of Carbon Monoxide-Unburnt hydrocarbon-Oxides of Nitrogen-
Smoke and Particulate matter – Methods of controlling Emissions – Catalytic converters-Selective
Catalytic Reduction and Particulate Traps – Methods of measurement – Emission norms .
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John,B.Heywood, "Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals", McGraw Hill Publishing Co.,
New York, 2017.
2. Ganesan,V., "Internal combustion engines", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., 2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Benson,R.S., Whitehouse,N.D., "Internal Combustion Engines", Pergamon Press, Oxford,
1979.
2. Ramalingam. K.K., "Internal combustion engine", scitech publications, Chennai, 2018.
3. Mathur. R.B. and R.P. Sharma, "Internal Combustion Engines"., Dhanpat Rai & Sons 2014..
4. Duffy Smith, "Auto Fuel Systems", The Good Heart Willcox Company, Inc., 1992.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 1 1 1 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 1 1 1 2 1
CO3 3 3 1 1 1 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 1 3
CO5 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 1 3
Average
3 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 3
Correlation Level
281
19MEE37 DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge on basics of heat exchanger, types, their design and analysis.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 : Explain about different types of heat exchangers.
CO2 : Design heat exchangers for industrial applications.
CO3 : Analyze the stresses and failures on heat exchanger elements.
CO4 : Design condenser and evaporator for industrial application.
CO5 : Demonstrate the concept of cooling tower and selection of their components.
(Use of Approved Design of Heat Exchanger Data book is Permitted)

COURSE CONTENT:

Introduction to heat exchangers, Types of heat exchangers, Shell and Tube heat exchangers,
Regenerators and Recuperators, Industrial applications. Temperature distribution and its implications
and Effectiveness.
UNIT 2: DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGER 9 hrs

Heat transfer correlations, Overall heat transfer coefficient, LMTD, NTU method for heat exchanger
analysis, heat exchanger design methodology, variable overall heat transfer coefficient, Heat
exchanger design calculation and pressure drop calculations.
UNIT 3: STRESS ANALYSIS 9 hrs

Stress in tubes – header sheets and pressure vessels – thermal stresses, shear stresses – types of
failures, buckling of tubes, flow induced vibration.
282
UNIT 4: CONDENSERS AND EVAPORATORS DESIGN 9 hrs

Design of surface and evaporative condensers and Design of shell and tube and plate type
evaporators.
UNIT 5: COOLING TOWERS 9 hrs

Introduction to cooling tower, packings, spray design, selection of pumps, fans and pipes, testing and
maintenance, experimental methods.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. T.Taborek, G.F. Hewitt and N.Afgan, “Heat Exchangers Theory and practice”, McGraw- Hill
1980.
2. WalkerG, “Industrial Heat Exchangers – A Basic Guide”, Mc Graw Hill Book Co. 1990.
3. Kuppan Thulukkanam, “ Heat Exchanger Design Handbook”, CRC Press, 2013.
REFERENCES:
1) Nicholas Cherrmisinoff, “Cooling Tower”, Ann Arbor Science Pub, 1981.
2) Arthur, P. Frass, “Heat Exchanger Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 1988 Second Edition.
3) J. P .Gupta, “Fundamentals of Heat exchanger and pressure vessels technology”, Hemisphere
publishing corporation, springer –Verlag (outside NA), 1986.
4) Donald Q. Kern and Alban D. Karus, “Extended surface heat transfer”, Mc Graw Hill Book
Co., 1972.
5) E.A.D. Sanders, “Heat Exchangers, Selection Design and Construction”, Layman Scientific
and Technical; co Published with John Wiley & Sons, 1989.
6) Donatello Annaratone, “ Hand book for Heat Exchangers and Tube Banks Design”, Springer,
2014.
7) https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105248/
Mapping
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO4 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 2 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 1
Average
3 3 3 2 1 1 3 2 1
Correlation Level
283
19MEE38 SOLAR ENGINEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about harvesting and harnessing solar energy.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Explain the basic concept of solar radiation.
CO2: Explain the basic of solar energy and its measurement.
CO3: Describe the methods for collecting solar energy.
CO4: Explain various types of solar cells and its applications.
CO5: Describe the use of solar energy for various applications.
COURSE CONTENT:

The Basics of solar energy - Brief history of solar energy utilization - Basic parameters of
the Sun - Blackbody radiation- Wien’s displacement law – Stefan Boltzmann law
Photoelectric effect - Einstein ‘s theory of photons, Air mass, Rayleigh scattering.
UNIT 2: ORIGIN OF SOLAR ENERGY AND MEASUREMENT 9 hrs

Rotation and orbital motion of the Earth around the Sun - Solar time, Sidereal time, universal
standard time, local standard time, Equation of time. Solar Radiation Measurement and Instruments -
problems.
UNIT 3: CONCENTRATION OF SOLAR ENERGY 9 hrs

Focusing solar collectors. Types – Construction and performance of Parabolic dish, Parabolic trough,
Linear Fresnel reflector, Solar tower problems.
284
UNIT 4: SOLAR CELLS 9 hrs

Principles of Solar cells, Structure of a solar cell, Crystalline silicon solar cells - Thin film solar cells:
CIGS, amorphous – silicon - Tandem solar cells - Dye - sensitized solar cells - Organic solar cells.
UNIT 5: APPLICATION OF SOLAR ENERGY 9 hrs

Solar thermal electricity using Stirling engine or Rankine engine - Solar photovoltaics with
concentration. Necessity of storage for solar energy- Chemical and Thermal energy storage –
Thermal Flywheels, Solar air heaters, Solar water heaters, Solar cookers, Solar stills, Solar ponds,
Solar pumps, Solar cabinet dryer, Solar space heating and cooling system - problems.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1) Sukhatme S.P., Solar Energy, Tata McGraw Hills P Co., 3rd Edition, 2017.
2) Rai, G.D., Solar Energy Utilization, Khanna Publishers, N. Delhi, 2010.
REFERENCES:
1) John JA Duffie and WA Beckman, Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes, John Wiley & sons,
2013.
2) Kreith, F and Kreider, J. F., Principles of Solar Engineering, McGraw-Hill, 2000.
3) Jui Sheng Hsieh, Solar Energy Engineering, Prentice-Hall, 2007.
4) M. Stix, the Sun, An Introduction, Second Edition, Springer 2012.
5) Nelson, the Physics of Solar Cells. Imperial College Press, 2003.
6) B.G. Streetman and S. Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
Mapping
CO1 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 3
CO3 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 3
CO4 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 3
CO5 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 3
Average
3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 3
Correlation Level
285
APPLIED
MATHEMATICS
286
19MEE39 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The objective of this course is to familiarize the students with statistical techniques.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Evaluate the statistical parameters for the given data.
CO2: Determine the value of the point estimators using the method of moments and method of
maximum likelihood.
CO3: Apply hypothesis testing for evaluating statistical parameters of large and small samples.
CO4: Apply the basic concepts of probability for decisions making.
CO5: Access the properties of Continuous random variables and Bivariate distributions.
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT 1: BASIC STATISTICS 9 hrs
Measures of Central tendency: Moments, skewness and Kurtosis - Probability distributions:

Binomial, Poisson and Normal - evaluation of statistical parameters for these three distributions,
Correlation and regression – Rank correlation
UNIT 2: ESTIMATION THEORY 9 hrs

Estimators: Unbiasedness, Consistency, Efficiency and Sufficiency – Maximum Likelihood
Estimation – Method of moments.
UNIT 3 TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9 hrs

Tests based on Normal, t, χ2 and F distributions for testing of means, variance and proportions –
Goodness of fit.
UNIT 4: BASIC PROBABILITY 9 hrs

Probability spaces, conditional probability, independence; Discrete random variables, Independent
random variables, the multinomial distribution, Poisson approximation to the binomial distribution,
287
infinite sequences of Bernoulli trials, sums of independent random variables; Expectation of Discrete
Random Variables, Moments, Variance of a sum, Correlation coefficient, Chebyshev’s Inequality.
UNIT 5: CONTINUOUS PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS & BIVARIATE

9 hrs
DISTRIBUTIONS
Continuous random variables and their properties, distribution functions and densities, normal,
exponential and gamma densities. Bivariate distributions and their properties, distribution of sums
and quotients, conditional densities, Baye’s rule.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1) B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 35th Edition, 2010.
2) S.C.Gupta, Vk Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, Sultan Chand & Sons,2017.
3) Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,2010.
REFERENCES:
1) P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and C. J. Stone, Introduction to Probability Theory, Universal Book
Stall, 2003 (Reprint).
2) S. Ross, A First Course in Probability, 6th Ed., Pearson Education India, 2013.
3) W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and its Applications, Vol. 1, 3rd Ed., Wiley,
1968.
4) N.P. Bal and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Publications,
Reprint, 2019.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
CO3 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
Average
3 3 2 1 2 3 1 1
Correlation Level
288
SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES IN MECHANICAL

19MEE40
ENGINEERING
L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
• To expose the concepts of feed forward neural networks.
• To provide adequate knowledge about feedback neural networks.
• To teach about the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems.
• To expose the ideas about Genetic Algorithm
• To provide adequate knowledge about of FLC and NN toolbox
COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1: Describe the fundamental theory and concepts of Neural networks and to identify different neural
architectures, algorithms, applications and their limitations
CO2: Apply Feedback neural networks in modeling
CO3: Comprehend the Fuzzy logic and the concepts of fuzziness involved in various systems and Fuzzy set
theory
CO4: Explain the Genetic Algorithm in optimization
CO5: Apply the various optimization algorithm to solve engineering.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION AND ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9 hrs
Introduction of soft computing - soft computing vs. hard computing- various types of soft
computing techniques- applications of soft computing-Neuron- Nerve structure and synapse- Artificial
Neuron and its model- activation functions- Neural network architecture- single layer and multilayer
feed forward networks- McCullochPitts neuron model- perceptron model- Adaline and Madaline-
multilayer perception model- back propogation learning methods- effect of learning rule coefficient-
back propagation algorithm- factors affecting back propagation training- applications.
UNIT 2: ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9 hrs
Counter propagation network- architecture- functioning & characteristics of counter- Propagation
289
network-Hopfield/ Recurrent network- configuration- stability constraints-associative memory- and

characteristics- limitations and applications- Hopfield v/s Boltzman machine- Adaptive Resonance
Theory- Architecture- classifications-Implementation and training-Associative Memory.
UNIT 3: FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM 9 hrs
Introduction to crisp sets and fuzzy sets- basic fuzzy set operation and approximate reasoning. Introduction to
fuzzy logic modeling and control- Fuzzification- inferencing and defuzzification- Fuzzy knowledge and rule
bases-Fuzzy modeling and control schemes for nonlinear systems. Self organizing fuzzy logic control- Fuzzy logic
control for nonlinear time delay system.
UNIT 4: GENETIC ALGORITHM 9 hrs
Basic concept of Genetic algorithm and detail algorithmic steps-adjustment of free Parameters- Solution
of typical control problems using genetic algorithm- Concept on some other search techniques like tabu
search and ant colony search techniques for solving optimization problems.
UNIT 5: APPLICATIONS 9 hrs
GA application to power system optimization problem- Case studies: Identification and control of linear and
nonlinear dynamic systems using Matlab-Neural Network toolbox. Stability analysis of Neural Network
interconnection systems- Implementation of fuzzy logic controller using Matlab fuzzy logic toolbox-Stability
analysis of fuzzy control systems.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kalyanmoy Deb, Optimization for Engineering Design- Algorithms and Examples, PHI
Learning Private Ltd, Second Edition, 2012
2. S. Rajasekaran and G.A. Vijayalakshmi Pai, Neural networks, Fuzzy logic and Genetic
Algorithms; Synthesis and Applications, PHI Learning Private Ltd, 2nd , 2013.
REFERENCES:
1.Laurene V. Fausett, Fundamentals of Neural Networks: Architectures, Algorithms And

Applications, Pearson Education 2004.
2. Timothy J. Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications” Wiley India 2011.
3. Zimmermann H.J. "Fuzzy set theory and its Applications" Springer international edition,
2014.
4.David E.Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization, and Machine Learning”,
Pearson Education, 2009.
290

Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 2 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 2
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 2
Average 2
3 2 3 3 3 1 2 2 2
Correlation Level
291
OPEN ELECTIVES
292
19MEP01 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about industrial safety and its Acts relate with health and environmental
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Prepare report for causes of an accident in industry.
CO2: Describe the importance of safety training.
CO3: Describe the industrial acts relate with health and environment.
CO4: Demonstrate the effect of chemical and biological hazards and control.
CO5: Implement the safety concept in material handling and in electrical work.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING 9 hrs

Concept of an accident, reportable and non reportable accidents, unsafe act and condition – principles
of accident prevention, Supervisory role- Role of safety committee – Accident causation models - Cost
of accident. Overall accident investigation process - Response to accidents, India reporting
requirement, Planning document, Planning matrix, Investigators Kit, functions of investigator, four
types of evidences, Records of accidents, accident reports- Class exercise with case study.
UNIT 2: SAFETY EDUCATION AND TRAINING 9 hrs

Importance of training-identification of training needs-training methods – programmes, seminars,
conferences, competitions – method of promoting safe practice - motivation – communication - role of
government agencies and private consulting agencies in safety training – creating awareness, awards,
celebrations, safety posters, safety displays, safety pledge, safety incentive scheme, safety campaign –
Domestic Safety and Training.
UNIT 3: INDUSTRIAL SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT ACTS 9 hrs
293
Tamilnadu Factories Rules 1950 under Safety and health chapters of Factories Act 1948-Statutory
authorities – inspecting staff, health, safety, provisions relating to hazardous processes, welfare,
working hours, employment of young persons.
General powers of the central government, prevention, control and abatement of environmental
pollution-Biomedical waste (Management and handling Rules, 1989-The noise pollution (Regulation
and control) Rules, 2000-The Batteries (Management and Handling Rules) 2001- No Objection
certificate from statutory authorities like pollution control board.
Air Act 1981 and Water Act 1974: Central and state boards for the prevention and control of air
pollution-powers and functions of boards – prevention and control of air pollution and water pollution
– fund – accounts and audit, penalties and procedures.
UNIT 4: CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL HAZARDS 9 hrs

Recognition of chemical hazards-dust, fumes, mist, vapour, fog, gases, types, concentration, Exposure
vs. dose, TLV - Methods of Evaluation, process or operation description, Field Survey, Sampling
methodology, Industrial Hygiene calculations, Comparison with OSHAS Standard. Air Sampling
instruments, Types, Measurement Procedures, Instruments Procedures, Gas and Vapour monitors, dust
sample collection devices, personal sampling Methods of Control - Engineering Control, Design
maintenance considerations, design specifications - General Control Methods - training and education
UNIT 5 SAFETY MEASURES IN MATERIAL HANDLING AND ELECTRICAL

9 hrs
WORK
General safety consideration in material handling, Ropes, Chains, Sling, Hoops, Clamps, Arresting
gears and Prime movers, Ergonomic consideration in material handling, Design, installation, operation
and maintenance of conveying equipments, Hoisting, traveling and slewing mechanisms, Selection,
operation and maintenance of industrial trucks.
Safety measures for electric work, Overload and other protections, Energy conservation and safety.
Electrical work in hazardous atmosphere, Static electricity.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations”, N.S.C.Chicago, 1997.

2. Blake R.B., “Industrial Safety” Prentice Hall, Inc., New Jersey, 2000.
3. Air (Prevention and control of pollution) act 1981, Commercial Law Publishers (India) Pvt.Ltd.,
New Delhi 1981.
294
4. Canter.R.L, “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill, 1996.

5. N.V. Krishnan “Safety in Industry” Jaico Publishery House, 1996.
REFERENCES:
1. Heinrich H.W. “Industrial Accident Prevention” McGraw-Hill Company, New York, 1980.
2. The Environment Act (Protection) 1986, Commercial Law Publishers (India) Pvt.Ltd., New
Delhi 1986.
3. The Factories Act 1948, Madras Book Agency, Chennai, 2000
4. Water (Prevention and control of pollution) act 1974, Commercial Law publishers (India)
Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi 1974.
Mapping
CO1 3 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
CO3 3 1 3 1 2 1 2 3
CO4 3 1 3 1 2 1 2 3
CO5 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1
Average
3 1 2 1 2 1 2 2
Correlation Level
295
19MEP02 NEW AND RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart sufficient knowledge about the promising new and renewable sources of energy and its
applications
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the different forms of energy and its environmental aspects.
CO2: Explain various systems utilizing solar energy
CO3: Explain the techniques to harvest the energy from wind, tidal and geo thermal system.
CO4: Illustrate the methods of extraction of energy from waste.
CO5: Explain the advanced renewable energy sources and its application.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT 9 hrs

Primary energy sources – World energy resources – Indian energy scenario – Energy cycle of the
earth – Environmental aspects of energy utilization, CO2 emissions and Global warming –
Renewable energy resources and their importance – Potential impacts of harnessing the different
renewable energy resources.
UNIT 2: SOLAR ENERGY 9 hrs

Principles of solar energy collection – Solar radiation – Measurements – Instruments – Data and
estimation – Types of collectors – Characteristics and design principles of different type of collectors
– Performance of collectors – Testing of collectors – Solar thermal applications – Water heaters and
air heaters – Performance and applications – Simple calculations – Solar cooling – Solar drying –
Solar ponds – Solar tower concept – Solar furnace.
296
UNIT 3: WIND, TIDAL AND GEO THERMAL ENERGY 9 hrs

Energy from the wind – General theory of windmills – Types of windmills – Design aspects of
horizontal axis windmills – Applications – Energy from tides and waves – Working principles of tidal
plants and ocean thermal energy conversion plants – Power from geothermal energy – Principle of
working of geothermal power plants.
UNIT 4: BIO ENERGY 9 hrs

Energy from bio mass and bio gas plants – Various types – Design principles of biogas plants –
Applications – Energy from wastes – Waste burning power plants – Utilization of industrial and
municipal wastes – Energy from the agricultural wastes.
UNIT 5 OTHER RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES 9 hrs

Direct energy conversion (Description, principle of working and basic design aspects only) –
Magneto hydrodynamic systems (MHD) – Thermoelectric generators – Thermionic generators – Fuel
cells – Solar cells – Types, EMF generated, power output, losses and efficiency and applications –
Hydrogen conversion and storage systems.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rai, G.D., ―Non conventional Energy sources‖, Khanna Publishers, 1999.

2. Desai, A.V., ―Non-conventional Energy‖, Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1996.
REFERENCES:
1. Sukhatme, S.P., ―Solar Energy‖, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2017.
2. Sulton, ―Direct Energy Conversion‖, McGraw-Hill, 1966.
3. Duffie and Beckmann, ―Solar Energy Thermal Processes‖, John Wiley, 2013.
4. Garg, H.P. and Prakash, J., ―Solar Energy - Fundamentals and Applications‖, TMH, 2017..

Mapping
CO1 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 3
Average
3 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 3
Correlation Level
297
19MEP03 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS FOR ENGINEERS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. To enable the students to create an awareness on Engineering Ethics and Human Values
2. To instill Moral and Social Values and Loyalty and to appreciate the rights and duties of humans.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the views of Indian Philosopher on human values
CO2: Discuss the ethical issues related to Engineering
CO3: Comprehend social experimentation, research ethics and codes of ethics
CO4: Illustrate the responsibilities and rights in the society
CO5: Illustrate the global issues pertaining to ethics
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: HUMAN VALUES 10 hrs

Views of Indian Philosophers Thiruvalluvar, Mahathma Gandhi and Dr. Abdul kalam on human
values: Truth and Altruism for Real Leadership, Sovereignty, Western Philosopher Leo Tolstoy views
on human values. Self Realisation: Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and meditation for professional
excellence and stress management, not falling in conformity and conflict of interest.
UNIT 2: ENGINEERING ETHICS 9 hrs
Senses of „Engineering Ethics‟ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –
Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg‟s theory – Gilligan‟s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles - Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of
Ethical Theories
UNIT 3: ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION: 9 hrs
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters –Research ethics- Codes of
Ethics – A Balanced Outlook on Law. Challenger Case Study
298
UNIT 4: SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9 hrs

Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Occupational Crime – Professional
Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination- Case studies.
Chernobyl Nuclear disaster and Bhopal disaster
UNIT 5: GLOBAL ISSUES 8 hrs
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development –
Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors –
Moral Leadership –Code of Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility
Total Hours 45
TEXTBOOK:
1. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2017.
REFERENCES:
1. Thiruvalluvar, ‘Thirukural’ Related chapters and verses on Human values
2. Dr. A.P.J. Abdulkalam ‘ You are Unique’, Punya Publishing Pvt.Ltd, 2012
3. Leo Tolstoy, ‘ Wise thoughts for every day life’ Arcade Publishing, New York. 2011.
4. Bob Proctor, “ You were born rich” Life success productions, 2016.
5. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2011.
6. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts
and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2013.
7. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2017.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
Average
3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
Correlation Level
299
19MEP04 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To familiarize the students with basic concepts of management and process of organization.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Demonstrate the basic concepts of management.
CO2: Explain the planning and polices followed in organization.
CO3: Develop the procedure for recruitment, selection and training.
CO4: Illustrate the motivation theories, leadership and process of communication.
CO5: Evaluate the productivity problems and management in organization.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9 hrs

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur – types of managers -
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations, system and
contingency approaches – Types of Business organization – Sole proprietorship, partnership,
company-public and private sector enterprises – Organization culture and Environment – Current
trends and issues in Management
UNIT 2: PLANNING 9 hrs

Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives – setting
objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management – Planning Tools and Techniques
– Decision making steps and process.
UNIT 3: ORGANISING 9 hrs

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization structure
– types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority – centralization and
300
decentralization – Job Design – Human Resource Management – HR Planning, Recruitment,

selection, Training and Development, Performance Management, Career planning and management
UNIT 4: DIRECTING 9 hrs

Foundations of individual and group behavior – motivation – motivation theories – motivational
techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –
communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective communication –
communication and IT.
UNIT 5: CONTROLLING 9 hrs

System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use of
computers and IT in Management control – Productivity problems and management – control and
performance – direct and preventive control – reporting.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2015..
2. Tripath PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1999
REFERENCES:
1. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”,6 th Edition, 2018..
2. Robbins S.P. and Coulter M., “Management”, Prentice Hall India, 10th edition, 2019.
3. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of
Management” 7th Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.

Mapping
CO1 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1
CO3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1
CO5 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1
Average
2 2 2 2 3 2 2 1
Correlation Level
301
19MEP05 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about concepts of supply chain management. strategic sourcing, planning
demand, inventory and its latest trends in supply chain management
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1: Describe the fundamentals of supply chain in an industry
CO2: Explain the basic of outsourcing
CO3: Design the supply chain network using optimization models.
CO4: Explain the concepts of planning demand, inventory and supply.
CO5: Describe the concept of various latest trends
COURSE CONTENT:

Supply Chain – Fundamentals –Evolution- Role in Economy - Importance - Decision Phases -
Supplier- Manufacturer-Customer chain. - Enablers/ Drivers of Supply Chain Performance. Supply
chain strategy - Supply Chain Performance Measures.
UNIT 2: STRATEGIC SOURCING 9 hrs

Outsourcing – Make Vs buy - Identifying core processes - Market Vs Hierarchy - Make Vs buy
continuum -Sourcing strategy - Supplier Selection and Contract Negotiation. Creating a world class
supply base- Supplier Development - World Wide Sourcing.
UNIT 3: SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK 9 hrs
Distribution Network Design – Role - Factors Influencing Options, Value Addition – Distribution
Strategies - Models for Facility Location and Capacity allocation. Distribution Centre Location
Models. Supply Chain Network optimization models. Impact of uncertainty on Network Design -
Network Design decisions using Decision trees.
302
UNIT 4: PLANNING DEMAND, INVENTORY AND SUPPLY 9 hrs

Managing supply chain cycle inventory. Uncertainty in the supply chain –- Analyzing impact of
supply chain redesign on the inventory - Risk Pooling - Managing inventory for short life - cycle
products -multiple item -multiple location inventory management. Pricing and Revenue Management.
Deterministic models; safety stock inventory control systems.
UNIT 5: LATEST TRENDS 9 hrs

Supply Chain Integration - Building partnership and trust in SC Value of Information: Bullwhip
Effect - Effective forecasting - Coordinating the supply chain. SC Restructuring - SC Mapping -SC
process restructuring, Postpone the point of differentiation – IT in Supply Chain - Agile Supply
Chains -Reverse Supply chain. Agro Supply Chains.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Janat Shah, Supply Chain Management: Text and Cases, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education India,
2016
2. Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindl, Supply Chain Management-Strategy Planning and Operation,
PHI Learning / Pearson Education, 5th edition, 2015.
REFERENCES:
1) Ballou Ronald H, Business Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Pearson Education, 5th
edition, 2013
2) David Simchi-Levi, Philip Kaminsky, Edith Simchi-Levi, Designing and Managing the
Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies, and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill,3rd edition, 2007.
3) Shapiro Jeremy F, Modeling the Supply Chain, Thomson Learning, Second Reprint, 2013.
4) Joel D. Wisner, G. Keong Leong, Keah-Choon Tan, Principles of Supply Chain Management
A Balanced Approach, South-Western, Cengage Learning, 3rd edition, 2018..
Mapping
CO1 3 1 1 - - 2 1 1 - 1 - 3 2 2 1
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 1 1 - - 2 1 1 - 1 - 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 3 3 - - 1 3 - - 1 - 3 1 1 1
CO4 3 1 1 - - 2 3 - - 1 - 3 1 1 1
CO5 3 2 1 - - 1 3 - - 1 - 3 1 1 1
Average
3 2 1 - - 2 3 1 - 1 - 3 1 1 1
Correlation Level
303
19MEP06 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
To impart knowledge about concepts of Classical Design of Experiments, various techniques and its
application.
COURSE OUTCOMES:

CO1: Describe the fundamental principles of Classical Design of Experiments.
CO2: Apply the single factor experiment for optimizing the process parameter.
CO3: Apply the Factorial Design principles for optimizing the process parameter.
CO4: Explain the Taguchi’s approach to attain robustness in the experimental design.
CO5: Apply the Response Surface Method to evaluate the interaction of process parameters.
COURSE CONTENT:
UNIT 1: FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPERIMENTAL DESIGNS 9 hrs
Hypothesis testing – single mean, two means, dependant/ correlated samples – confidence intervals,
Experimentation – need, Conventional test strategies, F-test, terminology, basic principles of design,
steps in experimentation – choice of sample size – Normal and half normal probability plot – simple
linear and multiple linear regression, Analysis of variance.
UNIT 2: SINGLE FACTOR EXPERIMENTS 9 hrs
Completely Randomized Design- effect of coding the observations- model adequacy checking -
estimation of model parameters, residuals analysis- treatment comparison methods- Duncan’s multiple
range test, Newman-Keuel’s test, Fisher’s LSD test, Tukey’s test- Testing using contrasts- Randomized
Block Design – Latin Square Design- Graeco Latin Square Design – Applications.
UNIT 3: FACTORIAL DESIGNS 9 hrs
Main and Interaction effects - Two and three factor full factorial designs- Fixed effects and random
effects model - Rule for sum of squares and Expected Mean Squares- 2K Design with two and three
304
factors- Yate’s Algorithm- fitting regression model- Randomized Block Factorial Design. Blocking and
Confounding in 2K Designs- blocking in replicated design- 2K Factorial Design in two blocks-
Complete and partial confounding- Confounding 2K Design in four blocks - Two level Fractional
Factorial Designs- Construction of one-half and one-quarter fraction of 2K Design
UNIT 4: TAGUCHI METHODS 9 hrs
Design of experiments using Orthogonal Arrays, Data analysis from Orthogonal experiments- Response
Graph Method, ANOVA- Attribute data analysis- Robust design- noise factors, Signal to Noise ratios,
Inner/outer OA design- case studies.
UNIT 5: RESPONSE SURFACE METHODS AND SHAININ DOE 9 hrs
Introduction to Response Surface Methods, Central Composite Design. Basics of Shainin DOE -
Problem Solving Algorithm - Problem Identification Tools- Shainin DOE Tools - case studies.
Total Hours 45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Krishnaiah K, and Shahabudeen P, “Applied Design of Experiments and Taguchi Methods”, PHI,1st
Edition, 2012.
2. Panneerselvam R, “ Design and Analysis of Experiments” PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2012
REFERENCES:
1. Box, G. E., Hunter,W.G., Hunter, J.S., Hunter,W.G., “Statistics for Experimenters: Design,
Innovation, and Discovery”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2005.
2. Douglas C. Montgomery, “Design and Analysis of Experiments”, John Wiley & sons, 2012.
3. Krishnaiah K, Applied Statistical Quality Control and Improvement,1st Edition,2014
4. Phillip J. Ross, “Taguchi Techniques for Quality Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, India, 2005.
Mapping
CO1 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
Course Outcomes
CO2 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
CO5 3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
Average
3 3 2 2 1 1 3 2
Correlation Level

03 Mech Ug Full 7copies

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

03 Mech Ug Full 7copies

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

03 Mech Ug Full 7copies

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALAGAPPA CHETTIAR GOVERNEMNT COLLEGE OF

ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY

B.E. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

(FULL TIME) & PART TIME

Applicable to the students admitted from the

1. College Vision and Mission 1

2. Department Vision and Mission 2

3. Programed Educational Objective (PEO) 3

4. Programed Outcomes (PO) 4

5. Programed Speciﬁc Outcomes (PSO) 6

6. Regulation 2019 UG (Full time) 7

7. Regulation 2019 UG (Part time) 25

8. I Year (Full Time) Curriculum and Syllabus 37

Alagappa Chettiar Government College

COLLEGE VISION AND MISSION

productivity and prosperity for our country.

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Vision of the Department:

To become a center of excellence and to produce high quality, self-motivated,

creative and ethical engineers and technologists, contributing effectively to

Mission of the Department:

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES

PEO1 To provide a strong foundation in Mathematics, Basic Sciences and

Engineering fundamentals required to excel in Mechanical Engineering.

design and analyze engineering products.

PEO3 To motivate the students for lifelong learning, entrepreneurship abilities

with ethical values.

PEO4 To train the students to have effective communication, team building,

leadership and decision making so as to be a successful professional

engineer fulfilling societal needs.

Engineering Graduates will be able to:

1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science,

2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze

3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering

4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based

5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques,

6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual

7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional

8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and

9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a

10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering

11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES

2. Have the knowledge in the area of Contemporary Design

3. Be capable to respond to Environmental and Societal needs.

ALAGAPPA CHETTIAR GOVERNMENT COLLEGE OF

(An Autonomous Institution, Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

(CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM)

Degree of Bachelor of Engineering

(Applicable to the students who are admitted

ALAGAPPA CHETTIAR GOVERNMENT COLLEGE OF

over and above the minimum credit requirement prescribed in the

1 Hr. Tutorial (T) per week 1 credit

1 Hr. Practical (P) per week 0.5 credit

4.4 Course Load

(b) Practical Courses

Review Review Review Guide End Semester Examinations

permitted to appear all courses registered in that particular semester examinations.

SL. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P M C